At PDF

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE GI
SECTION AT MA
EM
LC
EC
CONTENTS FE
EURO-OBD EURO-OBD
CL
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................5 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................5 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................56 MT
Introduction ................................................................56
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................7 EURO-OBD Function for A/T System .......................56
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR One or Two Trip Detection Logic of EURO-OBD......56
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............7 EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)............56
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (EURO- Malfunction Indicator (MI) ..........................................60 AX
OBD) System of A/T and Engine - Euro-OBD -..........7 CONSULT-II ...............................................................60
Precautions ..................................................................7 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II..............69
Service Notice or Precautions .....................................9 SU
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis...................10 GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
PREPARATION .............................................................11
Special Service Tools ................................................11 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................75 BR
Commercial Service Tools .........................................13 Introduction ................................................................75
A/T FLUID ......................................................................15 Work Flow..................................................................79
ST
Checking A/T Fluid ....................................................15
Changing A/T Fluid ....................................................15 EURO-OBD
OVERALL SYSTEM ......................................................16 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................80
RS
A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................16 Introduction ................................................................80
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................18 Work Flow..................................................................84
Cross-sectional View - 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19,
BT
3AX63 and 3AX64 models ........................................20 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........86
Cross-sectional View - 3AX10 and 3AX18 A/T Fluid Check .........................................................86 HA
models .......................................................................21 Stall Test ....................................................................86
Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................22 Line Pressure Test.....................................................90
Shift Mechanism ........................................................23 Road Test...................................................................91 SC
Control System ..........................................................32 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
Control Mechanism....................................................33 DESCRIPTION ............................................................. 111
Control Valve .............................................................38 EL
Symptom Chart........................................................ 111
TCM Terminals and Reference Value......................125
GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........129 IDX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN....................................129
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................40 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................130
CONSULT-II ...............................................................40
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II..............45
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME EURO-OBD
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T (REVOLUTION DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP)
SENSOR) .....................................................................132 SWITCH .......................................................................189
Description ...............................................................132 Description ...............................................................189
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................134 Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................191
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................135 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................192
VHCL SPEED SEN.MTR VEHICLE SPEED Component Inspection.............................................194
SENSOR·MTR..............................................................137 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Description ...............................................................137 CIRCUIT .......................................................................195
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................138 Description ...............................................................195
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................139 Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ......................................197
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR................................140 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................198
Description ...............................................................140 Component Inspection.............................................200
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................142 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................143 (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ...........................................201
Component Inspection.............................................147 Description ...............................................................201
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A.......................................148 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................203
Description ...............................................................148 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................150 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .......................206
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................151 Description ...............................................................206
Component Inspection.............................................153 Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................207
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ......................................154 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................208
Description ...............................................................154 DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION ....................210
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................156 Description ...............................................................210
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157 Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................213
Component Inspection.............................................159 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................214
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE...................160 Component Inspection.............................................215
Description ...............................................................160 DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION....................217
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................161 Description ...............................................................217
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................162 Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................220
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID Component Inspection.............................................222
VALVE..........................................................................165 DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION....................223
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................167 Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................226
Component Inspection.............................................170 Component Inspection.............................................228
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION ....................229
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....171 Description ...............................................................229
Description ...............................................................171 Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH ......................................233
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................173 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................234
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174 Component Inspection.............................................238
Component Inspection.............................................177 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL............................................178 SOLENOID VALVE).....................................................239
Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................179 Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................241
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE .......................182 Component Inspection.............................................244
Description ...............................................................182 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ...245
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................184 Description ...............................................................245
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................185 Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................247
AT-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Component Inspection.............................................251 5. Large Shock. ″N″ -> ″R″ Position .......................306 GI
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ..................252 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In ″R″
Description ...............................................................252 Position ....................................................................308
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................254 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In ″D″, ″2″ MA
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................255 Or ″1″ Position.........................................................311
Component Inspection.............................................257 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ...................314
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ..................258 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2 Or Does Not
EM
Description ...............................................................258 Kickdown: D4 -> D2..................................................317
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................260 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3.............................320 LC
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................261 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4 .............................323
Component Inspection.............................................263 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .........................326
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........264 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ..............328 EC
Description ...............................................................264 14. Lock-up Is Not Released...................................330
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................267 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................268 Braking D4 -> D3).....................................................331 FE
Component Inspection.............................................272 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 .......................333
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D3, When CL
VALVE..........................................................................273 Overdrive Control Switch ″ON″ -> ″OFF″ ...............334
Description ...............................................................273 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> 22, When Selector
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................275 Lever ″D″ -> ″2″ Position.........................................335 MT
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................276 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 -> 11, When Selector
Component Inspection.............................................278 Lever ″2″ -> ″1″ Position .........................................336
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....279 Brake........................................................................337
Description ...............................................................279 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
AX
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................281 Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................282 Circuit Checks) ........................................................337
Component Inspection.............................................285 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM.........................................346 SU
DTC VHCL SPEED SEN.MTR VEHICLE SPEED Description ...............................................................346
SENSOR·MTR..............................................................286 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location............346
Description ...............................................................286 Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................347 BR
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................288 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................348
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................290 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ..........................................352
Components.............................................................352
ST
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT Removal...................................................................352
(ROM)...........................................................................291 Installation................................................................353 RS
Description ...............................................................291 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..............................................354
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................291 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............354
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) .............................293 Control Cable Adjustment........................................355 BT
Description ...............................................................293 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment .....355
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................294 Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement ...................356
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ...............295 Revolution Sensor Replacement .............................356 HA
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC/General and REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................357
Except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle Removal...................................................................357
SC
East..........................................................................295 Installation................................................................358
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC/EURO-OBD .........297 OVERHAUL .................................................................360
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On....299 Components-1 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 EL
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In ″P″ and ″N″ and 3AX64 models ..................................................360
Position ....................................................................302 Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............361
3. In ″P″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Components-2 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 IDX
Backward When Pushed .........................................303 and 3AX64 models ..................................................362
4. In ″N″ Position, Vehicle Moves ...........................304 Components-2 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............363
AT-3
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Components-3 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 Adjustment (1) .........................................................450
and 3AX64 models ..................................................364 Assembly (2)............................................................458
Components-3 3AX10 and 3AX18 models .............365 Adjustment (2) .........................................................462
Oil Channel ..............................................................366 Assembly (3)............................................................465
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Assembly (4)............................................................468
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings - 3AX00, 01, SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......473
19, 63 and 64 models..............................................367 General Specifications.............................................473
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Shift Schedule..........................................................473
Thrust Washers and Snap Rings - 3AX10 and Stall Revolution........................................................476
3AX18 models .........................................................368 Line Pressure...........................................................476
DISASSEMBLY............................................................369 Control Valves..........................................................477
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .........................384 Clutch and Brakes ...................................................477
Manual Shaft............................................................384 Clutch and Brake Return Springs............................480
Oil Pump ..................................................................387 Oil Pump ..................................................................480
Control Valve Assembly...........................................391 Input Shaft ...............................................................481
Control Valve Upper Body .......................................400 Planetary Carrier......................................................481
Control Valve Lower Body .......................................404 Final Drive................................................................481
Reverse Clutch ........................................................406 Reduction Pinion Gear ............................................483
High Clutch ..............................................................410 Output Shaft - 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch........................415 and 3AX64 models ..................................................484
Low & Reverse Brake..............................................422 Output Shaft - 3AX10 and 3AX18 models ..............486
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Bearing Retainer......................................................487
Overrun Clutch Hub.................................................426 Total End Play..........................................................487
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/ Reverse Clutch End Play ........................................487
Retainer - 3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models .........430 Accumulator .............................................................487
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear Band Servo ..............................................................488
and Bearing Retainer - 3AX10 and 3AX18 Removal and Installation .........................................488
models .....................................................................435 Shift Solenoid Valves...............................................488
Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................440 Solenoid Valves .......................................................488
Final Drive................................................................445 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor.................................488
ASSEMBLY..................................................................449 Revolution Sensor ...................................................488
Assembly (1)............................................................449 Dropping Resistor ....................................................488
AT-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EURO-OBD
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJAT0243

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD system or not by the
NJAT0243S01
GI
“Type approval number” on the identification plate. Refer to GI-42,
“IDENTIFICATION PLATE”. MA
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system EM

Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system
LC
DTC
Items
Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II EC
GST*1
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-210

FE
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-217
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-223

CL
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-229
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-195

MT
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-206
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-245
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-273
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-189 AX

SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-252
SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-258 SU

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-239
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-264 BR

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-201
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

ST
*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-5
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX EURO-OBD
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NJAT0243S02
Check if the vehicle is a model with Euro-OBD system or not by the
“Type approval number” on the identification plate. Refer to GI-42,
“IDENTIFICATION PLATE”.
Type approval number Model
Available With Euro-OBD system
Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system
DTC
Items
CONSULT-II Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
GST*1
P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-189
P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-195
P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-201
P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-206
P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-210
P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-217
P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-223
P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-229
P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-239
P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-245
P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-252
P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-258
P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-264
P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-273
*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

*2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.
AT-6
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
NJAT0249
GI
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo- MA
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer- EM
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat
belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision LC
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision). EC
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: FE
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer. CL
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section. MT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just
before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (EURO-
OBD) System of A/T and Engine — Euro-OBD AX
— NJAT0245
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the SU
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any BR
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will ST
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
RS
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube BT
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and HA
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precautions NJAT0246
SC
I Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the EL
TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
IDX
SEF289H
AT-7
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
AAT470A
I Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether TCM functions prop-
erly or not. (See page AT-125.)
MEF040DA
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
SAT964I
I Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-

side of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts
from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
I Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
I Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the opera-
tion of the transaxle.
I Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper
assembly.
I All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose,
non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
I Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the
transaxle is disassembled.
I It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they
are indicated.
I The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme
care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disas-
sembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper
assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from
becoming scattered or lost.
I Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along
bores in valve body under their own weight.
I Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all
AT-8
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or
hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not
use grease. GI
I Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings,
seals and gaskets when assembling.
I After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. MA
I When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is
drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF
cooling system.
EM
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the
AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to “Changing A/T
Fluid”, AT-15.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Service Notice or Precautions NJAT0247
FAIL-SAFE NJAT0247S01
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. AX
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The
customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about SU
8 seconds. [For GENERAL AND EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD, AUSTRALIA AND THE MIDDLE EAST; “SELF-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)”, refer to AT-45 and for EURO-OBD; “TCM SELF-DI-
AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-69.] BR
The blinking of the O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be
cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “WORK FLOW” [Refer to AT-79 (General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle ST
East), AT-84 (EURO-OBD).]
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. RS
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE NJAT0247S02
BT
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
I External leaks in the hub weld area.
HA
I Converter hub is scored or damaged.
I Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
I Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. SC
I Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
I Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.) EL
I Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
I Internal failure of stator roller clutch. IDX
I Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
I Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
AT-9
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)
I The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
I The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
I Transaxle failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate
lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
I Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch
dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such
as taxi, delivery or police use.
EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSIS — EURO-OBD — NJAT0247S04
I A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator (MI). Refer to the table on AT-61
for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
I The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MI are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memo-
ries.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-58 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MI.
I The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
− PNP switch
− A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
*: For details of EURO-OBD, refer to EC-535, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”.
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to EURO-OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-7, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJAT0248
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-32, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-21, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
AT-10
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools NJAT0006
Tool number
Description GI
Tool name
ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

Oil pressure gauge set MA
1 ST25051001
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000 EM
Hose
3 ST25053000
Joint pipe LC
4 ST25054000
Adapter
5 ST25055000 EC
Adapter NT097
KV31103000 Installing differential oil seal

Drift (Use with ST35325000.) FE
a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
CL
NT105
ST35325000 Installing differential oil seal

Drift (Use with KV31103000.)
MT
a: 215 mm (8.46 in)
b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia.
c: M12 x 1.5P
NT417 AX
KV31103200 Removing and installing clutch return spring
Clutch spring compres- a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
sor b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
SU
BR
ST
NT423
ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate, manual RS

Pin punch plate and differential pinion mate shaft retaining
pins
a: 2.3 mm (0.091 in) dia. BT
b: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
NT442
KV32101000 Installing throttle lever and manual shaft retaining HA

Pin punch pins
a: 4 mm (0.16 in) dia.
SC
NT410 EL
ST25710000 Aligning groove of manual shaft and hole of trans-
Pin punch mission case
a: 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. IDX
NT410
AT-11
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Description
Tool name
ST3306S001 Removing differential side bearing inner race

Differential side bearing a: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
puller set b: 29.5 mm (1.161 in) dia.
1 ST33051001 c: 130 mm (5.12 in)
Puller d: 135 mm (5.31 in)
2 ST33061000 e: 120 mm (4.72 in)
Adapter
NT745
KV381054S0 I Removing idler gear bearing outer race

Puller I Removing differential side oil seals
I Removing differential side bearing outer race
I Removing needle bearing from bearing retainer
a: 250 mm (9.84 in)
b: 160 mm (6.30 in)
NT414
ST27180001 I Removing idler gear

Puller a: 100 mm (3.94 in)
b: 110 mm (4.33 in)
c: M8 x 1.25P
NT424
ST30031000 Removing reduction gear bearing inner race

Puller a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.
b: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
NT411
ST35272000 I Installing reduction gear bearing inner race

Drift I Installing idler gear bearing inner race
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 35.5 mm (1.398 in) dia.
NT426
ST37830000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

Drift a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
NT427
ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
NT073
AT-12
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool number
Description
Tool name
GI
ST30633000 Installing differential side bearing outer race
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. MA
NT073
EM
ST35271000 I Installing idler gear
Drift a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. LC
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
EC
NT115
ST33400001 I Installing oil pump housing oil seal

FE
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
CL
NT115
KV38105710 I Measuring clearance between side gear and MT

Preload adapter differential case
NT087
KV40104840 I Installing output shaft bearing outer race onto

Drift bearing retainer AX
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 42 mm (1.65 in) dia.
SU
NT108
BR
Commercial Service Tools NJAT0007 ST

Tool name Description
Puller I Removing idler gear bearing inner race RS

I Removing and installing band servo
piston snap ring
BT
NT077
HA
Drift Removing idler gear bearing inner race
a: 34 mm (1.34 in) dia.
SC
NT109
Drift Installing differential left side bearing EL

a: 86 mm (3.39 in) dia.
b: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
IDX
NT115
AT-13
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name Description
Drift Installing differential right side bearing

a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
NT115
AT-14
A/T FLUID
Checking A/T Fluid
Checking A/T Fluid NJAT0228

1. Warm up engine.
2. Check for fluid leakage. GI
3. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures
of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on dipstick. MA
a. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
b. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear posi-
tion. Leave selector lever in “P” position. EM
c. Check fluid level with engine idling.
d. Remove dipstick and note reading. If level is at low side of
SMA827CA
either range, and fluid to the charging pipe. LC
e. Re-insert dipstick into charging pipe as far as it will go.
f. Remove dipstick and note reading. If reading is at low side of EC
range, add fluid to the charging pipe.
Do not overfill.
4. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. FE
5. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122
to 176°F) using “HOT” range on dipstick. CL
MT
6. Check fluid condition.
I If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to AT section for
checking operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of
A/T.
I If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), AX
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to LC-17, “Radia-
tor”. SU
BR
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid NJAT0229 ST

1. Warm up A/T fluid.
2. Stop engine.
3. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. RS
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
Fluid grade:
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or
BT
Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Canada). Refer to “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND HA
LUBRICANTS”, MA-21.
SMA027D
Fluid capacity (With torque converter):
7.0 (6-1/8 Imp qt) SC
Drain plug:
: 29 - 39 N·m (3.0 - 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb)
EL
4. Run engine at idle speed for five minutes.
5. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to “Checking A/T Fluid”.
If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. IDX
AT-15
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location
A/T Electrical Parts Location NJAT0008

GENERAL, EURO-OBD & EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBDNJAT0008S01
SAT069K
AT-16
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location (Cont’d)
AUSTRALIA & MIDDLE EAST NJAT0008S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT275K
AT-17
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram NJAT0009

GENERAL & EXCEPT FOR EURO-OBD, AUSTRALIA &
THE MIDDLE EAST NJAT0009S01
HAT133
AT-18
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
EURO-OBD NJAT0009S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT128
AT-19
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 and 3AX64 models
Cross-sectional View — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19,

3AX63 and 3AX64 models NJAT0011
SAT042K
AT-20
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Cross-sectional View — 3AX10 and 3AX18

models NJAT0217
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT842J
AT-21
OVERALL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Control Circuit
Hydraulic Control Circuit NJAT0012
SAT844J
AT-22
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism
Shift Mechanism NJAT0013

CONSTRUCTION NJAT0013S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT998I
MT
1. Torque converter 9. Front internal gear 17. Overrun clutch
2. Oil pump 10. Front planetary carrier 18. Low one-way clutch
3. Input shaft 11. Rear sun gear 19. Low & reverse brake
4. Brake band 12. Rear pinion gear 20. Parking pawl
5. Reverse clutch 13. Rear internal gear 21. Parking gear AX
6. High clutch 14. Rear planetary carrier 22. Output shaft
7. Front sun gear 15. Forward clutch 23. Idle gear
8. Front pinion gear 16. Forward one-way clutch 24. Output gear SU
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE NJAT0013S03

BR
Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function
5 Reverse clutch R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 7.

ST
6 High clutch H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 10.
15 Forward clutch F/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with forward one-way clutch 16.
RS
17 Overrun clutch O/C To connect front planetary carrier 10 with rear internal gear 13.
BT
4 Brake band B/B To lock front sun gear 7.
16 Forward one-way clutch F/O.C When forward clutch 15 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 13 from rotat-
ing in opposite direction against engine revolution. HA
18 Low one-way clutch L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 10 from rotating in opposite direction against
engine revolution. SC
19 Low & reverse brake L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 10.
EL
IDX
AT-23
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART NJAT0013S04
Band servo Low

For- Over- Forward Low &
Reverse High one-
ward run one-way reverse
Shift position clutch clutch way Lock-up Remarks
clutch clutch 2nd 3rd 4th clutch brake
5 6 clutch
15 17 apply release apply 16 19
18
PARK
P
POSITION
REVERSE
R q q
POSITION
NEUTRAL
N
POSITION
1st q *1D B B
Automatic
2nd q *1A q B shift
D*4
3rd q q *1A *2C C B *5q 1k2k3
k4
4th q C *3C C q q
1st q D B B Automatic
2 shift
2nd q A q B 1k2
Locks (held
1st q q B q
stationary)
1 in 1st
speed
2nd q q q B
1g2
*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.

*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
*5: Operates when overdrive control switch is “OFF”.
q : Operates.
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.
AT-24
OVERALL SYSTEM
POWER TRANSMISSION =NJAT0013S02
“N” and “P” Positions
I “N” position
NJAT0013S0201
GI
Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the clutches do not operate.
I “P” position MA
Similar to the “N” position, the clutches do not operate. The parking pawl engages with the parking gear
to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT991I
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-25
OVERALL SYSTEM
“11” Position =NJAT0013S0202
I Forward clutch As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
I Forward one-way clutch reverse brake.
I Overrun clutch This is different from that of D1 and 21.
I Low and reverse brake
Engine brake Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when
decelerating.
SAT374J
AT-26
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D1” and “21” Positions =NJAT0013S0203
I Forward one-way clutch Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of GI
I Forward clutch these three clutches.
I Low one-way clutch
D1: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 MA
Overrun clutch
21: Always engaged
engagement conditions
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-
(Engine brake)
way clutch. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT377J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-27
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D2”, “22” and “12” Positions =NJAT0013S0204
I Forward clutch Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now
I Forward one-way rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
clutch As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward
I Brake band one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier com-
pared with that of the 1st speed.
Overrun clutch D2: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions 22 and 12: Always engaged
SAT378J
AT-28
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D3” Position =NJAT0013S0205
I High clutch Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is GI
I Forward clutch connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.
I Forward one-way This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier
clutch to turn at the same speed.
MA
Overrun clutch D3: Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16
engagement conditions
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT379J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-29
OVERALL SYSTEM
“D4” (OD) Position =NJAT0013S0206
I High clutch Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
I Brake band This front carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes
I Forward clutch (Does not affect power front internal gear (output) turn faster.
transmission)
At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine
Engine brake
brake can be obtained when decelerating.
SAT380J
AT-30
OVERALL SYSTEM
“R” Position =NJAT0013S0207
I Reverse clutch Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse GI
I Low and reverse brake brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.
MA
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be
Engine brake
obtained when decelerating.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT381J
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-31
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System
Control System =NJAT0014

OUTLINE NJAT0014S01
The automatic transaxle senses vehicle operating conditions through various switches and sensors. It always
controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
SWITCHES & SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS
PNP switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch Shift control Shift solenoid valve A
Wide open throttle position Line pressure control Shift solenoid valve B
switch Lock-up control Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal Overrun clutch control Torque converter clutch solenoid
A/T fluid temperature sensor E Timing control E valve
Revolution sensor Fail-safe control Line pressure solenoid valve
Vehicle speed sensor Self-diagnosis O/D OFF indicator lamp (Except
Overdrive control switch (Except CONSULT-II communication line for the Middle East)
for the Middle East) control A/T check indicator lamp (For
Stop lamp switch Duet-EA control the Middle East)
A/T check switch (For the Middle
East)
CONTROL SYSTEM NJAT0014S02
SAT276K
AT-32
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System (Cont’d)
TCM FUNCTION =NJAT0014S03
The function of the TCM is to:
I Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. GI
I Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
I Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. MA
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM NJAT0014S04
Sensors, switches and solenoid Function EM

valves
PNP switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. LC
Throttle position sensor Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.
Closed throttle position switch Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM. EC
Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends
Wide open throttle position switch
a signal to TCM.
FE
Engine speed signal From ECM.
A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.
Input CL
Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.
Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution

Vehicle speed sensor
sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.
MT
Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D4” (overdrive) position, to the
Overdrive control switch*1
TCM.
Stop lamp switch Releases lock-up system when depressing pedal in lock-up condition.
A/T check switch*2 Inputs a signal for AT self-diagnosis. AX

Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent
Shift solenoid valve A/B
from TCM. SU
Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in rela-
Line pressure solenoid valve
tion to a signal sent from TCM.
BR
Torque converter clutch solenoid Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in
Output valve relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a ST

Overrun clutch solenoid valve
signal sent from TCM.
O/D OFF indicator lamp Shows TCM faults when A/T control components malfunction. RS
A/T check indicator lamp*2 Shows TCM faults when A/T control components malfunction.
*1: Except for the Middle East BT

*2: For the Middle East only
HA
Control Mechanism NJAT0015

SC
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL NJAT0015S01
TCM has various line pressure control characteristics to match the EL
driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve
based on TCM characteristics. IDX
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically con-
trolled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate
engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
AT-33
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Normal Control NJAT0015S0101
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suit-
able clutch operation.
SAT003J
Back-up Control (Engine brake) NJAT0015S0102

If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 (OD)
or D3, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the trans-
mission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be
increased to deal with this driving force.
SAT004J
During Shift Change NJAT0015S0103

The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a
change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift
solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting
shock.
SAT005J
At Low Fluid Temperature NJAT0015S0104

I Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing
change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-con-
tacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid
temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.
I The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent

shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission
fluid when temperature is low.
SAT006J
AT-34
OVERALL SYSTEM
I Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and GI
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.
MA
EM
SAT007J LC
SHIFT CONTROL NJAT0015S02
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate EC
vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished
by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and
throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration per- FE
formance and fuel economy.
CL
MT
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B NJAT0015S0201
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to sig-
nals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to
select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule
memorized in the TCM. AX
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to
the shift valve. SU
BR
SAT008J
Relation Between Shift Solenoid Valves A and B and

Gear Positions ST
NJAT0015S0203
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve RS
D1, 21, 11 D2, 22, 12 D3 D4 (OD) N-P
A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed)

BT
B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)
Control of Shift Valves A and B NJAT0015S0202

HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT009J
AT-35
OVERALL SYSTEM
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves
A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B.
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the
shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face
of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
LOCK-UP CONTROL NJAT0015S03
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked
to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission
efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty
signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to an oil pres-
sure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
Conditions for Lock-up Operation NJAT0015S0301
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and
throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the
lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
Overdrive control switch ON OFF
Selector lever “D” position
Gear position D4 D3
Vehicle speed sensor More than set value
Throttle position sensor Less than set opening
Closed throttle position switch OFF
A/T fluid temperature sensor More than 40°C (104°F)
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control NJAT0015S0302

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period,
and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of
OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is
reduced and pilot pressure remains high.
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
SAT010J
OFF-time INCREASING
"
Amount of drain DECREASING
"
Pilot pressure HIGH
"
Lock-up RELEASING
SAT011J
AT-36
OVERALL SYSTEM
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve OperationNJAT0015S0303
GI
MA
EM
LC
AAT155A
Lock-up released EC
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end
face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with FE
spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter
pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston
release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston CL
remains unlocked.
Lock-up applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid MT
valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly,
the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the
other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pres-
sure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch
piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and AX
release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE SU
CONTROL) NJAT0015S04
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in down-
shifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the BR
wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to
the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the
engine brake is not effective. ST
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions NJAT0015S0401
RS
Selector lever position Gear position Throttle opening
“D” position D1, D2, D3 gear position BT

Less than 3/16
“2” position 21, 22 gear position
“1” position 11, 12 gear position At any position

HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT014J
AT-37
OVERALL SYSTEM
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control NJAT0015S0402
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF sig-
nal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control
(engine brake control).
When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port
closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve.
SAT015J
Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation NJAT0015S0403

When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure is applied to the
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch
control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch
does not engage.
When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure is not generated.
At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is pro-
vided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the over-
run clutch to engage.
In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
SAT016J
Control Valve NJAT0016

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES NJAT0016S01
Valve name Function
Pressure regulator valve, plug Regulates oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving
and sleeve conditions.
Pressure modifier valve and Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-
sleeve modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving condi-
tions.
Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up
mechanism, overrun clutch, shift timing.
Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
Shift valve A Simultaneously switches four oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to
meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th , 3rd ,
2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
AT-38
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Valve (Cont’d)
Valve name Function
Shift valve B Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in GI
relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th , 3rd ,
2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. MA
Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with
application of the brake band in D4. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during
D4.) EM
1st reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-shifting
from the “1” position 12 to 11. LC
Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase
the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. EC
Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Torque converter clutch control Activates or inactivates the lock-up function. FE

valve, plug and sleeve Also provides smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system.
1-2 accumulator valve and piston Dampens the shock encountered when 2nd gear band servo contracts, and provides smooth CL
shifting.
3-2 timing valve Switches oil pressure with 3-2 timing valve according to throttle opening.
MT
Shuttle control valve Reduces shock when down-shifting from 3rd to 2nd and regulates overrun clutch.
Cooler check valve Regulates oil pressure which causes lock-up when driving at low speeds.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II NJAT0022
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT-II)” (AT-40), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-77. Reference pages are provided follow-
ing the items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechani-
cal parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunction-
ing. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic pro-
cedures.
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
I Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point
where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at
the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion
of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4) Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Opera-
tion Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)

NJAT0022S02
1. Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-125. If result is NG, refer to EL-11, “POWER
SUPPLY ROUTING”.
SAT014K
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT-II performs “REAL TIME DIAG”.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis-
played at real time.
SAT987J
AT-40
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE NJAT0022S03
Detected items GI
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode) Malfunction is detected when ... Remarks
Item Display MA
No failure I No failure has been detected.
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDICATED EM
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**)
Initial start I This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shut-

ting off a power supply to the TCM, this message LC
INITIAL START — appears on the screen.)
Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
SEN·A/T the sensor.
EC
Vehicle speed sensor VHCL SPEED I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
(Meter) SEN·MTR the sensor. FE
Throttle position sen- THROTTLE POSI I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage
sor SEN from the sensor.
Throttle position switch
CL
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT SOLENOID/V A I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
to operate the solenoid valve. MT
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
to operate the solenoid valve.
Overrun clutch sole- OVERRUN CLUTCH I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
noid valve S/V to operate the solenoid valve.
AX
T/C clutch solenoid T/C CLUTCH SOL/V I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
valve to operate the solenoid valve.
A/T fluid temperature BATT/FLUID TEMP I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage To be displayed in SU
sensor SEN from the sensor. case of abnormality
and when no recording
is made. BR
Engine speed signal ENGINE SPEED SIG I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from
the ECM.
ST
Line pressure solenoid LINE PRESSURE S/V I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries
valve to operate the solenoid valve.
TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.

RS
(RAM)
TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. BT

(ROM)
TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT (EEP I TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
ROM)
HA
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) NJAT0022S04 SC

Monitor item
Item Display Description Remarks
TCM input Main sig- EL
signals nals
Vehicle speed sensor 1 VHCL/S SE·A/T I Vehicle speed computed When racing engine in “N”
(A/T) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of revolution or “P” position with vehicle IDX
(Revolution sensor) X — sensor is displayed. stationary, CONSULT-II
data may not indicate 0
km/h (0 mph).
AT-41
Monitor item
Item Display TCM input Main sig- Description Remarks
signals nals
Vehicle speed sensor 2 VHCL/S SE·MTR I Vehicle speed computed Vehicle speed display may
(Meter) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of vehicle not be accurate under
speed sensor is dis- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph).
X —
played. It may not indicate 0 km/h
(0 mph) when vehicle is
stationary.
Throttle position sensor THRTL POS SEN I Throttle position sensor

[V] X — signal voltage is dis-
played.
A/T fluid temperature sen- FLUID TEMP SE I A/T fluid temperature

sor [V] sensor signal voltage is
X — displayed.
I Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.
Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT I Source voltage of TCM

X —
[V] is displayed.
Engine speed ENGINE SPEED I Engine speed, com- Engine speed display may
[rpm] puted from engine not be accurate under
speed signal, is dis- approx. 800 rpm. It may
X X
played. not indicate 0 rpm even
when engine is not run-
ning.
Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of overdrive
control SW is displayed.
PN position switch PN POSI SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of PN posi-
tion SW is displayed.
R position switch R POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of R position
SW is displayed.
D position switch D POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of D position
SW is displayed.
2 position switch 2 POSITION SW I ON/OFF status, com-

[ON/OFF] puted from signal of 2
X —
position SW, is dis-
played.

X —
played.
ASCD cruise signal ASCD-CRUISE I Status of ASCD cruise I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] signal is displayed. when no ASCD is
X — ON ... Cruising state mounted.
OFF ... Normal running
state
ASCD OD cut signal ASCD-OD CUT I Status of ASCD OD I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] release signal is dis- when no ASCD is
X — played. mounted.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not released
AT-42
Monitor item
TCM input Main sig- GI
signals nals
Kickdown switch KICKDOWN SW I ON/OFF status, com- I This is displayed even

[ON/OFF] puted from signal of when no kickdown MA
X —
kickdown SW, is dis- switch is equipped.
played.
EM
Closed throttle position CLOSED I ON/OFF status, com-
switch THL/SW puted from signal of
X —
[ON/OFF] closed throttle position LC
SW, is displayed.
Wide open throttle position W/O THRL/P-SW I ON/OFF status, com-

switch [ON/OFF]
X —
puted from signal of EC
wide open throttle posi-
tion SW, is displayed.
Gear position GEAR I Gear position data used

FE
— X for computation by TCM,
is displayed.
CL
Selector lever position SLCT LVR POSI I Selector lever position I A specific value used for
data, used for computa- control is displayed if
— X
tion by TCM, is dis- fail-safe is activated due MT
played. to error.
Vehicle speed VEHICLE SPEED I Vehicle speed data,

[km/h] or [mph] — X used for computation by
TCM, is displayed.
Stop lamp switch BRAKE SW I ON/OFF status are dis- AX

[ON/OFF] played.
ON: Brake pedal is
X —
depressed.
OFF: Brake pedal is
SU
released.
Throttle position THROTTLE POSI I Throttle position data, I A specific value used for BR
[/8] used for computation by control is displayed if
— X
TCM, is displayed. fail-safe is activated due
to error. ST
Line pressure duty LINE PRES DTY I Control value of line
[%] pressure solenoid valve,
— X computed by TCM from RS
each input signal, is dis-
played.
BT
Torque converter clutch TCC S/V DUTY I Control value of torque
solenoid valve duty [%] converter clutch sole-
— X noid valve, computed by
TCM from each input
HA
signal, is displayed.
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT S/V A I Control value of shift Control value of solenoid SC
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve A, com- is displayed even if sole-
— X puted by TCM from noid circuit is discon-
each input signal, is dis- nected. EL
played. The “OFF” signal is dis-
played if solenoid circuit is
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B I Control value of shift shorted.
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve B, com- IDX
— X puted by TCM from
played.
AT-43
Monitor item
signals nals
Overrun clutch solenoid OVERRUN/C S/V I Control value of overrun

valve [ON/OFF] clutch solenoid valve
— X computed by TCM from
each input signal is dis-
played.
Self-diagnosis display SELF-D DP LMP I Control status of O/D

lamp [ON/OFF] — X OFF indicator lamp is
(O/D OFF indicator lamp) displayed.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

( WITH CONSULT-II) NJAT0022S08
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to
turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait for at least 3 seconds and
then turn it “ON” again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON”, and touch “A/T”.
SAT014K
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
SAT971J
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.)
SAT970J
AT-44
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II NJAT0230

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT
CONSULT-II) GI
NJAT0230S01
Gen & Exc. for Euro-OBD NJAT0230S0101
1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

MA
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. EM
Wait 5 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position.
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT774B
4. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position. MT
5. Move selector lever to “P” position.
6. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
7. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
AX
SU
BR
SAT123KA ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. RS
No © Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-299.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-45
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
2 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Move selector lever to “D” position.
4. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position.
I Wait more than 2 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”.
SAT653E
© GO TO 3.

1. Move selector lever to “2” position.
2. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.
SAT780B
© GO TO 4.

SAT781B
© GO TO 5.
AT-46

1. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT981F EC
© GO TO 6.
FE
6 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-53. CL
MT
AX
SAT123KB SU
© DIAGNOSIS END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-47
Australia NJAT0230S0102

Wait 5 seconds.
SAT774B
SAT123KB
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
AT-48

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. GI
4. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT653E
CL
© GO TO 3.
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT780B ST
© GO TO 4.
RS
1. Move selector lever to “1” position. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT781B
© GO TO 5.
AT-49

1. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
SAT981F
© GO TO 6.

Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-53.
SAT123KB
© DIAGNOSIS END
AT-50
Middle East NJAT0230S0103
1 CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP GI

Wait 5 seconds. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT163C
5. Does A/T check indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? CL
MT
AX
SAT123KC SU
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. BR
ST
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. RS
2. Move selector lever to “D” position while pushing the shift lock release button.
3. Turn A/T check switch to “ON” position and hold it at “ON”.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT274K
© GO TO 3.
AT-51

2. Release A/T check switch (turn to “OFF” position).
SAT274K
© GO TO 4.

2. Turn A/T check switch to “ON” position and release it (turn to “OFF” position).
Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position.
SAT277K
© GO TO 5.

SAT981F
© GO TO 6.
AT-52

Check A/T check indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-53. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT123KC EC
© DIAGNOSIS END
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE FE

NJAT0230S02
O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp:

CL
All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
MT
AX
SU
SAT819H SAT806H
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SEN- BR
SOR).
General: AT-132
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT807H SAT808H SC
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR. ⇒ Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.
General: AT-137 General: AT-140 EL
IDX
AT-53
4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT809H SAT812H
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A. ⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B.
General: AT-148 General: AT-154
SAT815H SAT818H
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited
nected. or disconnected.
⇒ Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. ⇒ Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
General: AT-160 VALVE.
General: AT-165
SAT821H SAT823H
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
source circuit is damaged. ⇒ Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL.
⇒ Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM General: AT-178
POWER SOURCE.
General: AT-171
AT-54
10th judgement flicker is longer than others. Flickers as shown below. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT804H
Battery power is low.
SAT824H
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
EC
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon-
Battery is connected conversely.
nected.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
⇒ Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. FE
General: AT-182
Lamp comes on.

CL
MT
AX
SAT809J
PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch
circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒ Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
SU
OVERDRIVE CONTROL AND THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCHES).
General: AT-337 BR
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ST

( WITHOUT CONSULT-II) NJAT0230S03
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to RS
turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait for at least 3 seconds and
then turn it “ON” again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CON- BT
SULT-II)”. Refer to AT-45 (Gen & exc. for EURO-OBD), AT-48
(Australia) and AT-51 (Middle East).
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. (The self-diagnostic results will be HA
erased.)
SC
EL
IDX
AT-55
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EURO-OBD
Introduction
Introduction NJAT0251
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (EURO-OBD) performed by the TCM in combi-
nation with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MI (malfunction indicator) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with EURO-OBD self-diagnostic items. For
detail, refer to AT-61.
EURO-OBD Function for A/T System NJAT0252
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (EURO-OBD) functions for the A/T system. One
function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with EURO-OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The sig-
nal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding EURO-OBD-related part. The other
function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MI (malfunction indicator) on the instrument panel.
Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MI automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation
to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of EURO-OBD NJAT0253
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC NJAT0253S01
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MI will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored
in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC NJAT0253S02
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MI will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MI will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MI illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.
MI
Items
One trip detection Two trip detection
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 X
Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 X
Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 X
Except above X
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation.
EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) NJAT0254
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC NJAT0254S01
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720,
P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction.
However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still
occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is rec-
ommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC is shown in the following page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in SELF DIAGNOSIS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
AT-56
EURO-OBD Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
SAT014K LC
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT015K
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT016K
RS
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NJAT0254S0101
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
BT
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II
HA
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For
detail, refer to EC-559, “CONSULT-II”. SC
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once EL
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MI on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. IDX
AT-57
Priority Items
1 Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306

Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC NJAT0254S02
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as
described following.
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
I When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to EURO-OBD. For details, refer to EC-546, “How to Erase Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
I Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
I 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
I Freeze frame data
I 1st trip freeze frame data
I System readiness test (SRT) codes
I Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) NJAT0254S03
I If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF DIAGNOSIS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
AT-58
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT017K
SU
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) NJAT0254S04 BR

5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-69. (The engine ST
warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-570, “Generic Scan Tool (GST)”.
RS
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) NJAT0254S05
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. BT
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-69. (The engine warm-up step
can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-59
Malfunction Indicator (MI)
Malfunction Indicator (MI) =NJAT0255

1. The malfunction indicator will light up when the ignition switch
is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking
the lamp.
I If the malfunction indicator does not light up, refer to EL-221,
“Warning Lamps”.
(Or see MI & CONSULT-II in EC section. Refer to EC-550,
“Description”, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)” and EC-559, “CON-
SULT-II”.)
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator should go
SAT964I off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an emission-related (EURO-OBD) malfunction. For
detail, refer to EC-535, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION”.
CONSULT-II NJAT0256
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT-II)” (AT-61), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-82. Reference pages are provided follow-
ing the items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechani-
cal parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunction-
ing. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic pro-
cedures.
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
I Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point
where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at
the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion
of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4) Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Opera-
tion Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit.
AT-60
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)
NJAT0256S01
1. Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for EURO-OBD
detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. GI
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-125. If result is NG, refer to EL-11,
“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”. MA
EM
SAT014K LC
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation. EC
CONSULT-II performs “real time diagnosis”.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis-
played at real time. FE
CL
SAT987J
MT
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE NJAT0256S02
TCM self-diagnosis EURO-OBD (DTC)

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF AX
DIAGNOSIS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ... Available by
Available by
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator*2,
SU
“A/T” “ENGINE” indicator lamp or
“ENGINE” on CON-
“A/T” on CONSULT-II
SULT-II or GST
BR
PNP switch circuit I TCM does not receive the cor-
rect voltage signal (based on
— P0705
PNP SW/CIRC the gear position) from the ST
— switch.
Revolution sensor I TCM does not receive the

proper voltage signal from the X P0720
RS
VHCL SPEED VEH SPD SEN/CIR sensor.
SEN·A/T AT
Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) I TCM does not receive the BT

proper voltage signal from the X —
VHCL SPEED sensor.
—
SEN·MTR HA
A/T 1st gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st
gear position even if electrical — P0731*1
— A/T 1ST GR FNCTN circuit is good. SC
A/T 2nd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

gear position even if electrical — P0732*1 EL
— circuit is good.
A/T 3rd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd

gear position even if electrical — P0733*1 IDX
— A/T 3RD GR FNCTN circuit is good.
A/T 4th gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th

gear position even if electrical — P0734*1
— A/T 4TH GR FNCTN circuit is good.
AT-61

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF
Available by
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator*2,
SULT-II or GST
Shift solenoid valve A I TCM detects an improper volt-

age drop when it tries to operate X P0750
SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL A/CIRC the solenoid valve.
A
Shift solenoid valve B I TCM detects an improper volt-

SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL B/CIRC the solenoid valve.
B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-

OVERRUN CLUTCH O/R CLUCH SOL/ the solenoid valve.
S/V CIRC
T/C clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-

T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCC SOLENOID/ the solenoid valve.
CIRC
Line pressure solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper volt-

LINE PRESSURE L/PRESS SOL/CIRC the solenoid valve.
S/V
Throttle position sensor, I TCM receives an excessively

Throttle position switch low or high voltage from the
sensor. X P1705
THROTTLE POSI TP SEN/CIRC A/T
SEN
Engine speed signal I TCM does not receive the

proper voltage signal from the X P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG ECM.
A/T fluid temperature sensor I TCM receives an excessively

low or high voltage from the X P0710
BATT/FLUID TEMP ATF TEMP SEN/ sensor.
SEN CIRC
TCM (RAM) I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunc-

tioning. — —
CONTROL UNIT
—
(RAM)
TCM (ROM) I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunc-

tioning. — —
CONTROL UNIT
—
(ROM)
TCM (EEP ROM) I TCM memory (EEP ROM) is

malfunctioning. — —
CONT UNIT (EEP
—
ROM)
Initial start I This is not a malfunction mes-

sage (Whenever shutting off a
power supply to the TCM, this X —
INITIAL START message appears on the
—
screen.)
AT-62

Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELF GI
Available by MA
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator*2,
SULT-II or GST EM
No failure I No failure has been detected.
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDI-
CATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
X X LC
REQUIRED**)
X: Applicable EC
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MI if another malfunction is assigned to MI.
*2: Refer to EC-550, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)”. FE
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) NJAT0256S03
Monitor item CL
signals nals MT
Vehicle speed sensor 1 VHCL/S SE·A/T I Vehicle speed computed When racing engine in “N”
(A/T) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of revolution or “P” position with vehicle
(Revolution sensor) X — sensor is displayed. stationary, CONSULT-II
data may not indicate 0
km/h (0 mph).
AX
Vehicle speed sensor 2 VHCL/S SE·MTR I Vehicle speed computed Vehicle speed display may
(Meter) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of vehicle not be accurate under
speed sensor is dis- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
X —
played. may not indicate 0 km/h (0
SU
mph) when vehicle is sta-
tionary.
BR
Throttle position sensor THRTL POS I Throttle position sensor
SEN X — signal voltage is dis-
[V] played. ST
A/T fluid temperature sen- FLUID TEMP SE I A/T fluid temperature
sor [V] sensor signal voltage is
X — displayed. RS
I Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.
BT
Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT I Source voltage of TCM
X —
[V] is displayed.
Engine speed ENGINE SPEED I Engine speed, computed Engine speed display may HA
[rpm] from engine speed not be accurate under
signal, is displayed. approx. 800 rpm. It may
X X
not indicate 0 rpm even SC
when engine is not run-
ning.
Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW I ON/OFF state computed

EL
[ON/OFF] X — from signal of overdrive
control SW is displayed.
IDX
P/N position switch PN POSI SW I ON/OFF state computed
[ON/OFF] X — from signal of P/N posi-
tion SW is displayed.
AT-63
Monitor item
signals nals
R position switch R POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of R position
SW is displayed.
D position switch D POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed

[ON/OFF] X — from signal of D position
SW is displayed.

X —
played.

X —
played.
ASCD cruise signal ASCD-CRUISE I Status of ASCD cruise I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] signal is displayed. when no ASCD is
X — ON ... Cruising state mounted.
OFF ... Normal running
state
ASCD OD cut signal ASCD-OD CUT I Status of ASCD OD I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] release signal is dis- when no ASCD is
X — played. mounted.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not released
Kickdown switch KICKDOWN SW I ON/OFF status, com- I This is displayed even

[ON/OFF] puted from signal of when no kickdown
X —
kickdown SW, is dis- switch is equipped.
played.
Closed throttle position CLOSED I ON/OFF status, com-

switch THL/SW puted from signal of
X —
[ON/OFF] closed throttle position
SW, is displayed.
Wide open throttle position W/O THRL/P-SW I ON/OFF status, com-

switch [ON/OFF] puted from signal of
X —
wide open throttle posi-
tion SW, is displayed.
Gear position GEAR I Gear position data used

— X for computation by TCM,
is displayed.
Selector lever position SLCT LVR POSI I Selector lever position I A specific value used for
data, used for computa- control is displayed if
— X
tion by TCM, is dis- fail-safe is activated due
played. to error.
Vehicle speed VEHICLE I Vehicle speed data,

SPEED — X used for computation by
[km/h] or [mph] TCM, is displayed.
Stop lamp switch BRAKE SW I ON/OFF status are dis-

[ON/OFF] played.
ON: Brake pedal is
X —
depressed.
OFF: Brake pedal is
released.
AT-64
Monitor item
TCM input Main sig- GI
signals nals
Throttle position THROTTLE I Throttle position data, I A specific value used for
POSI used for computation by control is displayed if MA
— X
[/8] TCM, is displayed. fail-safe is activated due
to error.
EM
Line pressure duty LINE PRES DTY I Control value of line
[%] pressure solenoid valve,
— X computed by TCM from LC
played.
Torque converter clutch TCC S/V DUTY I Control value of torque EC

solenoid valve duty [%] converter clutch solenoid
— X valve, computed by
TCM from each input FE
signal, is displayed.
Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT S/V A I Control value of shift Control value of solenoid is
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve A, com- displayed even if solenoid CL
— X puted by TCM from circuit is disconnected.
each input signal, is dis- The “OFF” signal is dis-
played. played if solenoid circuit is MT
shorted.
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B I Control value of shift
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve B, com-
— X puted by TCM from
played.
AX
Overrun clutch solenoid OVERRUN/C S/V I Control value of overrun
valve [ON/OFF] clutch solenoid valve
— X computed by TCM from SU
each input signal is dis-
played.
Self-diagnosis display lamp SELF-D DP LMP I Control status of O/D BR

(O/D OFF indicator lamp) [ON/OFF] — X OFF indicator lamp is
displayed.
ST
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
RS
BT
HA
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II NJAT0256S04

SC
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure NJAT0256S0401
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector which is located
EL
in left side lower dash panel.
IDX
SAT998J
AT-65
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.
SAT586J
5. Touch “A/T”.
SAT014K
6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
SAT971J
7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).
SAT018K
SAT589J
AT-66
9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT019K LC
I When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT591J
MT
10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may
exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
AX
SU
BR
SAT592J
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT593J
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance SC

with instructions displayed.
EL
IDX
SAT594J
AT-67
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
SAT595J
13. CONSULT-II procedure ended.

If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
SAT596J
SAT593J
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE NJAT0256S05
DTC work support item Description Check items (Possible cause)
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be con-
I Shift solenoid valve A
firmed.
I Shift solenoid valve B
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Each clutch
ducted or not)
I Hydraulic control circuit
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve B
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve A
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-68
DTC work support item Description Check items (Possible cause)
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be con-
I Shift solenoid valve A GI
firmed.
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Line pressure solenoid valve MA
ducted or not)
I Each clutch
EM
LC
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II NJAT0352 EC

EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH
GST) NJAT0352S04
Refer to EC-570, section “Generic Scan Tool (GST)”. FE
CL
MT
EURO-OBD SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS) NJAT0352S05
Refer to EC-550, “Malfunction Indicator (MI)”.
AX
SU
BR
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

NJAT0352S06 ST
Preparation NJAT0352S0601
2. Connect the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener RS
and apply vacuum −25.3 kPa (−253 mbar, −190 mmHg, −7.48
inHg).
3. Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector. BT
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
5. Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch. HA
Continuity should exist.
SAT491J
(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and
closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum SC
until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)
6. Go to “Self-diagnostic procedure (Without CONSULT-II)”.
EL
IDX
SAT851JA
AT-69

Wait 5 seconds.
SAT774B
SAT138K
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.

SAT653E
© GO TO 3.
AT-70

1. Move selector lever to “2” position. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT780B
EC
© GO TO 4. FE

CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT781B
BR
© GO TO 5.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT981F
EL
© GO TO 6.
IDX
AT-71

Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-72.
SAT138K
© DIAGNOSIS END
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE NJAT0352S02
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
All judgement flickers are the same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT437F
SAT436F Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. ⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR).
EURO-OBD: AT-201
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT439F SAT441F
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR. ⇒ Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR.
EURO-OBD: AT-286 EURO-OBD: AT-264
AT-72
4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT445F
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
SAT443F ⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B. EC
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. EURO-OBD: AT-258
⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A.
EURO-OBD: AT-252 FE
CL
MT
SAT447F SAT449F AX
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited
nected. or disconnected.
⇒ Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. ⇒ Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE.
SU
EURO-OBD: AT-273
EURO-OBD: AT-239
8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT453F
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. HA
SAT451F
⇒ Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL.
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power EURO-OBD: AT-206
source circuit is damaged.
⇒ Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM SC
POWER SOURCE.
EURO-OBD: AT-279
EL
IDX
AT-73
10th judgement flicker is longer than others. Flickers as shown below.
SAT457F
SAT455F Battery power is low.
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
nected. Battery is connected conversely.
⇒ Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
EURO-OBD: AT-245
Lamp comes on.
SAT367J
PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch
circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒ Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
OVERDRIVE CONTROL AND THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCHES).
EURO-OBD: AT-337
t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second
AT-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS —
INTRODUCTION GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Introduction
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up GI
control via A/T solenoid valves.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good MA
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit- EM
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
SAT631IA
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the LC
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
EC
formed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-79.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with FE
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and CL
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-76) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. MT
SAT632I
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
AX
SU
BR
SEF234G
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-75
Introduction (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET =NJAT0023S01
Information from Customer NJAT0023S0101
KEY POINTS
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. model Engine Mileage
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day)
Symptoms l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position)
l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D)
l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st)
l Lockup malfunction
l Shift point too high or too low.
l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position)
l Noise or vibration
l No kickdown
l No pattern select
l Others
( )
O/D OFF indicator lamp or A/T Blinks for about 8 seconds.

check indicator lamp
l Continuously lit l Not lit
AT-76
Diagnostic Worksheet =NJAT0023S0102
1. l Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-9 GI

2. l CHECK A/T FLUID AT-86
l Leakage (Follow specified procedure) MA

l Fluid condition
l Fluid level
3. l Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. AT-86, 90 EM

l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
l Torque converter one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake

LC
l Reverse clutch l Low one-way clutch
l Forward clutch l Engine
l Overrun clutch l Line pressure is low EC
l Forward one-way clutch l Clutches and brakes except high clutch
and brake band are OK
FE
l Line Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4. l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-91

CL
4-1. Check before engine is started. AT-93
l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.

MT
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-132.
l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-137.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-140.
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-148.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-154.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-160. AX
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-165.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-171.
l Engine speed signal, AT-178.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-182. SU
l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-291.
l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-293.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-337. BR
l Battery
l Others
ST
4-2. Check at idle AT-95
l 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-299.

l 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-302. RS
l 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-303.
l 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-304.
l 5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-306. BT
l 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-308.
l 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-311.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-77
4. 4-3. Cruise test AT-98

AT-101
Part-1
l 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-314.

l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-317.
l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-320.
l 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-326.
l 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-328.
l 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-330.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-331.
Part-2 AT-105
l 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-333.

Part-3 AT-107
l 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-334
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3), AT-331.
l 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-335.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22), AT-331.
l 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-336.
l 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-337.
l 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches
Circuit Checks), AT-337.

l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-160.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-182.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-337.
l Battery
l Others
5. l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-41
6. l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-91
7. l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged AT-125
parts. AT-111
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
8. l Erase self-diagnosis code from TCM memories. AT-44

AT-55
AT-78
Work Flow
Work Flow NJAT0024

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR NJAT0024S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In
GI
general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint. MA
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-76) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-77), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
WORK FLOW CHART EM
NJAT0024S02
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT097KC
SC
*1: AT-76 *8: AT-40 *15: AT-111
*2: AT-77 *9: AT-40 *16: AT-44
EL
*3: AT-9 *10: AT-55 *17: AT-55
*4: AT-86 *11: AT-133 *18: AT-133
*5: AT-86 *12: AT-183 and AT-291 to AT-293 *19: AT-183 IDX
*6: AT-90 *13: AT-299 *20: AT-291
*7: AT-91 *14: AT-337 *21: AT-293
AT-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION EURO-OBD
Introduction
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up
control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal
sent from sensing elements used with the EURO-OBD related
parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The
TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM
can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
SAT631IA
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only, may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-84.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
SAT632I
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-81) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins for information.
SEF234G
AT-80
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET =NJAT0257S01
Information from Customer
KEY POINTS
NJAT0257S0101
GI
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies MA
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
EM
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Trans. model Engine Mileage LC

Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
Frequency l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day) EC

Symptoms l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position)
l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D) FE

l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st)
l Lockup malfunction CL
l Shift point too high or too low.
l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position) MT

l Noise or vibration
l No kickdown
l No pattern select
AX
l Others
( )
O/D OFF indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds. SU

l Continuously lit l Not lit
Malfunction indicator (MI) l Continuously lit l Not lit BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-81
Diagnostic Worksheet =NJAT0257S0102
1. l Read the Fail-safe and listen to customer complaints. AT-9
2. l CHECK A/T FLUID AT-86
l Leakage (Follow specified procedure)

l Fluid condition
l Fluid level
3. l Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. AT-86, 90
l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
l Torque converter one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake

l Reverse clutch l Low one-way clutch
l Forward clutch l Engine
l Overrun clutch l Line pressure is low
l Forward one-way clutch l Clutches and brakes except high clutch and
brake band are OK
l Line Pressure test — Suspected parts:
4. l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-91
4-1. Check before engine is started. AT-93
l PNP switch, AT-189.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-195.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-273.
l Battery
l Others
4-2. Check at idle AT-95
l 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-299.

l 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-302.
l 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-303.
l 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-304.
l 5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-306.
l 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-308.
l 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-311.
AT-82
4. 4-3. Cruise test AT-98

AT-101
Part-1 GI
l 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-314.
l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-320. MA
l 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-326.
l 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-328. EM
l 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-330.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-331.
LC
Part-2 AT-105
l 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-333.

l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-317. EC
Part-3 AT-107
FE
l 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3 When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-334
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3), AT-331. CL
l 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , 22, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-335.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22), AT-331.
l 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-336. MT
l 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-337.
l PNP switch, AT-189.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-195.
l Engine speed signal, AT-206. AX
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-252. SU
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-273. BR
ST
l Battery
l Others RS
5. l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-61
6. l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-91 BT

7. l Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. EC section
Refer to EC-536, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”. HA
l DTC (P0731) A/T 1st gear function, AT-210.
l DTC (P0732) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-217.
l DTC (P0733) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-223. SC
l DTC (P0734) A/T 4th gear function, AT-229.
8. l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged AT-111 EL
parts. AT-125
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)
IDX
9. l Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-58
AT-83
Work Flow
Work Flow NJAT0258

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR NJAT0258S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In
general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or
conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-81) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-82), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
AT-84
Work Flow (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW CHART NJAT0258S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT183K
*1: AT-81 *7: AT-60 *13: AT-337 IDX

*2: AT-82 *8: AT-56 *14: AT-111
*3: AT-9 *9: AT-72 *15: AT-58 and AT-59
*4: AT-86 *10: AT-189 *16: AT-189
*5: AT-86 and AT-90 *11: AT-286 and AT-291 to AT-293 *17: AT-286 and AT-291 to AT-293
*6: AT-91 *12: AT-299 *18: EC-536
AT-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check
A/T Fluid Check NJAT0025

FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK NJAT0025S01
1. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating sur-
face of converter housing and transmission case.
2. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” posi-
tion and wait a few minutes.
3. Stop engine.
SAT767B
4. Check for fresh leakage.
SAT288G
FLUID CONDITION CHECK NJAT0025S02
Fluid color Suspected problem
Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material
Milky pink Water contamination — Road water

entering through filler tube or breather
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown Oxidation — Over or under filling, —

and tacky Overheating
SAT638A
FLUID LEVEL CHECK NJAT0025S03
Refer to “Checking A/T Fluid”, AT-15.
Stall Test NJAT0026

STALL TEST PROCEDURE NJAT0026S01
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach
operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
AT-86
Stall Test (Cont’d)
3. Set parking brake and block wheels.
4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
I It is good practice to mark the point of specified engine GI
rpm on indicator.
MA
EM
SAT513G LC
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D
position.
6. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
EC
brake.
7. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately FE
release throttle.
I During test, never hold throttle wide open for less than 5
seconds. CL
Stall revolution:
SAT514G
QG13DE 2,000 - 2,300 rpm MT
QG15DE 2,000 - 2,300 rpm
QG16DE 2,200 - 2,700 rpm
QG18DE 2,050 - 2,500 rpm

AX
SU
BR
8. Move selector lever to “N” position.
9. Cool off ATF.
ST
I Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in “2”, “1” and “R” RS
positions.
BT
HA
SAT771B
JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST NJAT0026S02

SC
The test result and possible damaged components relating to each
result are shown in the illustrations on next page.
In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the EL
WORK FLOW shown in AT-79 (Gen & exc. for Euro-OBD, Austra-
lia & the Middle East) or AT-84 (EURO-OBD).
NOTE: IDX
Stall revolution is too high in “D”, “2” or “1” position:
I Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. .....
Low one-way clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs in the following gears:
AT-87
1st through 3rd gears in “D” position and engine brake func-
tions with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”.
1st and 2nd gears in “2” position and engine brake functions
with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... For-
ward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in R position:
I Engine brake does not function in “1” position. ..... Low &
reverse brake slippage
I Engine brake functions in “1” position. ..... Reverse clutch slip-
page
Stall revolution within specifications:
I Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnor-
mally.
I Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in “D” position. ..... High
clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in “D” position. ..... Brake
band slippage
I Engine brake does not function in 2nd and 3rd gears in “D”
position, 2nd gear in “2” position, and 1st gear in “1” position
with overdrive control switch set to “OFF”.
Stall revolution less than specifications:
I Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in
torque converter
AT-88
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT871HA
AT-89
Line Pressure Test
Line Pressure Test NJAT0027

LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS NJAT0027S01
Location of line pressure test ports are shown in the illustration.
I Always replace pressure plugs as they are self-sealing
bolts.
SAT561J
LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE NJAT0027S02

1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or
oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.
UAT008
4. Set parking brake and block wheels.

I Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed.
UAT008
5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
I When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the
stall test procedure.
Line pressure: Refer to SDS, AT-476.
SAT493G
AT-90
Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST NJAT0027S03
Judgement Suspected parts GI

Line pressure is low in all positions. I Oil pump wear
I Control piston damage
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking MA
I Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
I Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
I Clogged strainer EM
Line pressure is low in particular I Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
position. I For example, line pressure is:
− Low in “R” and “1” positions, but
LC
At idle − Normal in “D” and “2” positions.
Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-24. EC
Line pressure is high. I Maladjustment of throttle position sensor
I A/T fluid temperature sensor damaged FE
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
CL
I Open in dropping resistor circuit
Line pressure is low. I Maladjustment of throttle position sensor MT

I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
At stall I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
speed I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pilot valve sticking
AX
SU
BR
Road Test NJAT0028 ST

DESCRIPTION NJAT0028S01
I The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
A/T and analyze causes of problems. RS
I The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. Check before engine is started
BT
2. Check at idle
3. Cruise test
HA
SAT786A
I Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures SC

and items to check.
I Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. EL
Refer to the following items.
IDX
SAT496G
AT-91
Road Test (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSITC TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION SYMPTOMS
General and
Except for
Euro-OBD, AT-40 - AT-53 AT-299 to AT-337
Australia & the
Middle East
EURO-OBD AT-56 - AT-72 AT-299 to AT-337
AT-92
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED =NJAT0028S02
1 CHECK O/D OFF or A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP GI

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Move selector lever to “P” position. MA
4. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position (Except for the Middle East).
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT774B
6. Does O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? CL
MT
AX
SAT279K SU
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2. BR
No © Stop ROAD TEST. Go to “1. O/D OFF or A/T check Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”,
AT-299.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-93
2 CHECK O/D OFF or A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

Does O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?
SAT279K
Yes or No
Yes (General & except © Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-76.
for Euro-OBD, Australia Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II), AT-45.
& the Middle East)
No (General & except © 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
for Euro-OBD, Australia 2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
& the Middle East) Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II), AT-45.
3. Go to “2. CHECK AT IDLE”, AT-95.
Yes (EURO-OBD) © Perform self-diagnosis and check NG items on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET, AT-81.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS), AT-69.
No (EURO-OBD) © 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS), AT-69.
3. Go to “2. CHECK AT IDLE”, AT-95.
AT-94
2. CHECK AT IDLE =NJAT0028S03
1 CHECK ENGINE START GI

3. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT769B FE
4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes or No CL
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started MT
In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-302. Continue ROAD TEST.
2 CHECK ENGINE START

2. Move selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position. AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT770B RS
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes or No
BT
Yes © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started
In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-302. Continue ROAD TEST. HA
No © GO TO 3.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-95
3 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

SAT768B
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
SAT796A
Yes or No
Yes © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “3. In “P” Position, Vehicle
Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed”, AT-303. Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 4.

1. Apply parking brake.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position and start engine.
SAT771B
4. Release parking brake.
5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “4. In “N” Position, Vehicle
Moves”, AT-304. Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 5.
AT-96
5 CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Apply foot brake. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT797A
2. Move selector lever to “R” position. EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT772B
3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
Yes or No
AX
Yes © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “5. Large Shock “N” , “R”
Position”, AT-306. Continue ROAD TEST.
No © GO TO 6. SU
6 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE BR

1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT799A
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
SC
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7.
EL
No © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep
Backward In “R” Position”, AT-308. Continue ROAD TEST.
IDX
AT-97

1. Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” positions and check if vehicle creeps forward.
SAT773B
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
Yes or No
Yes © Go to 3. CRUISE TEST, AT-98.
No © Mark the box on the DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET. Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep
Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position”, AT-311. Continue ROAD TEST.
3. CRUISE TEST NJAT0028S04

I Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
With CONSULT-II NJAT0028S0401
I Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result.
I Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place
as per Shift Schedule.
SAT601J
CONSULT-II Setting Procedure NJAT0028S0402

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located
in left side lower dash panel.
SAT998J
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

SAT586J
AT-98
5. Touch “A/T”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT014K LC
6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT971J
MT
7. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”.
8. Select “Numerical Display”, “Barchart Display” or “Line Graph
Display”.
AX
SU
BR
SAT175K
9. Touch “SETTING” to recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or

“MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”. ST
10. Touch “Start”.
RS
BT
HA
SAT973J
11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”. SC
EL
IDX
SAT134K
AT-99
12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.
SAT135K
13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”.
SAT987J
SAT974J
14. Touch “DISPLAY”.

15. Touch “PRINT”.
16. Check the monitor data printed out.
17. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.
SAT975J
Without CONSULT-II NJAT0028S0403

I Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across
terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.
SAT417J
AT-100
Cruise Test — Part 1 =NJAT0028S0404
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION GI

1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) MA
3. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position (Except for the Middle East).
4. Move selector lever to “P” position. EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT774B CL
5. Start engine.
MT
AX
SU
SAT775B
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway. BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT495G HA
8. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
Yes or No SC
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1”, AT-314. Continue ROAD TEST. EL
IDX
AT-101
2 CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2)

Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-473.
SAT954I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-317. Con-
tinue ROAD TEST.

Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
SAT955I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-320. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-102

Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? GI
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-473. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT956I
Yes or No
FE
Yes © GO TO 5.
CL
5 CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U)
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
MT
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when lock-up occurs:
AX
SU
BR
SAT957I
Yes or No ST
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Go to “12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up”, AT-326. Continue ROAD TEST. RS
6 CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP BT

Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes or No
HA
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © Go to “13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition”, AT-328.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-103
7 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 L/U TO D4)

1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
SAT958I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 8.
No © Go to “14. Lock-up Is Not Released”, AT-330. Continue ROAD TEST.
8 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3)

1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3?
Read gear position and engine speed.
SAT959I
Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 2”, AT-105.
No © Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-331.
Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-104
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION GI

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position (Except for the Middle East).
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. MA
4. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT495G
Yes or No CL
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1”, AT-333. Continue ROAD TEST. MT
2 CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D4 TO D2)

1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully? AX
Read gear position and throttle position.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT404H
Yes or No BT
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-317. Con- HA
tinue ROAD TEST.
SC
EL
IDX
AT-105

Refer to Shift Schedule, AT-473.
SAT960I
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) AND ENGINE BRAKE

Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT405H
Yes or No
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-107.
AT-106
1 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3) GI

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT812A FE
4. Release accelerator pedal.
CL
MT
AX
SAT813A
5. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D4.
6. Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)? SU
Read gear position and vehicle speed.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT776BA
Yes or No HA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, SC
AT-334. Continue ROAD TEST.
EL
IDX
AT-107
2 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT776BA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
Continue ROAD TEST.
3 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D2)

1. Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF).
2. Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22?
Read gear position.
SAT791GA
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Go to “18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D2, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”,
AT-335. Continue ROAD TEST.
AT-108

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT791GA EC
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5. FE
Continue ROAD TEST.
CL
5 CHECK SHIFT DOWN
1. Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 22.
MT
2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?
Read gear position.
AX
SU
BR
SAT778B
ST
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
RS
No © Go to “19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector lever “2” , “1” Position”, AT-336.
Continue ROAD TEST.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-109

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
SAT778B
Yes or No
2. Perform self-diagnosis. General & except for Euro-OBD, Australia & the Middle East:
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)”, AT-45/EURO-
OBD: Refer to “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-69.
No © Go to “20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake”, AT-337. Continue ROAD
TEST.
AT-110
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart
Symptom Chart NJAT0029

Numbers are arranged in order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. GI
Reference Page
General and MA
except for
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Euro-OBD,
EURO-OBD EM
Australia &
the Middle
East
EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY

LC
1. Ignition switch and starter ROUTING” and SC-13,
Engine cannot start in “P” and “N” “STARTING SYSTEM”
positions. ON vehicle EC
AT-302 2. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
3. PNP switch adjustment AT-355 +

FE
Engine starts in position other than 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
“N” and “P” positions. ON vehicle
AT-302 2. PNP switch adjustment AT-355 + CL
1. Fluid level AT-86 +
2. Line pressure test AT-90 + MT

EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE
ON vehicle
POSITION POSITION
Transaxle noise in “P” and “N” SENSOR” SENSOR”
positions. AX
4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-132, AT-201,
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-137 AT-286
5. Engine speed signal AT-178 AT-206

SU
6. Oil pump AT-387 +
OFF vehicle BR
7. Torque converter AT-369 +
Vehicle moves when changing into ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
“P” position, or parking gear does ST
not disengage when shifted out of
“P” position. AT-364,
OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-365
AT-303 AT-365 RS
ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
Vehicle runs in “N” position. 2. Forward clutch AT-415 + BT

AT-304 OFF vehicle 3. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
4. Overrun clutch AT-415 + HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-111
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
2. Line pressure test AT-90 +

ON vehicle
3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245
Vehicle will not run in “R” position 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
(but runs in “D”, “2” and “1” posi-
tions). Clutch slips. 5. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
Very poor acceleration.
AT-308 6. High clutch AT-410 +
OFF vehicle 7. Forward clutch AT-415 +
8. Overrun clutch AT-415 +
9. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +
ON vehicle 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +

Vehicle braked when shifting into
5. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
“R” position.
6. High clutch AT-410 +
7. Brake band AT-440 +

OFF vehicle
8. Forward clutch AT-415 +
EC-267, “Idle EC-985, “Idle

Speed and Speed and
1. Engine idling rpm
Ignition Tim- Ignition Tim-
ing” ing”
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
Sharp shock in shifting from “N” to ON vehicle
“D” position. 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-171 AT-195
8. Accumulator N-D AT-354 +
Vehicle will not run in “D” and “2” ON vehicle 1. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
positions (but runs in “1” and “R” AT-362,
positions). OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-363
AT-363
AT-112
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
1. Fluid level AT-86 + EM

ON vehicle 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245 LC

Vehicle will not run in “D”, “1”, “2”
5. Accumulator N-D AT-354 +
EC
positions (but runs in “R” position).
Clutch slips. Very poor accelera- 6. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
tion. FE
AT-311 7. High clutch AT-410 +

OFF vehicle CL
9. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 +
AT-362,
10. Low one-way clutch
AT-363
AT-363 MT
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120 AX
POSITION POSITION
ON vehicle SENSOR” SENSOR” SU
Clutches or brakes slip somewhat 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245 BR
in starting.
7. Accumulator N-D AT-354 + ST

9. Reverse clutch AT-406 + RS

OFF vehicle 10. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +
11. Oil pump AT-387 + BT


HA
Speed and Speed and
Excessive creep. ON vehicle 1. Engine idling rpm
ing” ing” SC
ON vehicle 2. Line pressure test AT-90 +

EL
No creep at all. 3. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
AT-308 and AT-311 4. Forward clutch AT-415 +
IDX
OFF vehicle 5. Oil pump AT-387 +
AT-113
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252

Failure to change gear from “D1” ON vehicle
to “D2”. 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +

OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-440 +
3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154 AT-258

ON vehicle
Failure to change gear from “D2” 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
to “D3”.

OFF vehicle

Failure to change gear from “D3” ON vehicle
to “D4”. 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-132, AT-201,
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Too high a gear change point from
SENSOR” SENSOR”
“D1” to “D2”, from “D2” to “D3”,
ON vehicle
from “D3” to “D4”. 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-132, AT-201,
AT-317, AT-320 and AT-323 sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-137 AT-286

Gear change directly from “D1” to ON vehicle
2. Accumulator servo release AT-354 +
“D3” occurs.
AT-114
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
EC-267, “Idle EC-985, “Idle EM

Speed and Speed and
Engine stops when shifting lever ON vehicle ing” ing” LC
into “R”, “D”, “2” and “1”. 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-165 AT-239
3. Control valve assembly AT-354 + EC

OFF vehicle 4. Torque converter AT-369 +
EC-122, EC-639, FE
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION CL
SENSOR” SENSOR”
Too sharp a shock in change from ON vehicle 2. Line pressure test AT-90 +
“D1” to “D2”.
MT
OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-440 + AX

EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE SU
POSITION POSITION
ON vehicle SENSOR” SENSOR”
Too sharp a shock in change from BR
“D2” to “D3”. 2. Line pressure test AT-90 +

ST
OFF vehicle
RS
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE BT
POSITION POSITION
Too sharp a shock in change from
“D3” to “D4”. 2. Line pressure test AT-90 + HA

SC
OFF vehicle
EL
IDX
AT-115
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Almost no shock or clutches slip- ON vehicle SENSOR” SENSOR”
ping in change from “D1” to “D2”.
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
ON vehicle POSITION POSITION
Almost no shock or slipping in SENSOR” SENSOR”
change from “D2” to “D3”.

OFF vehicle
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
ON vehicle POSITION POSITION
Almost no shock or slipping in SENSOR” SENSOR”
change from “D3” to “D4”.

OFF vehicle
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 +
2. Reverse clutch AT-406 +
Vehicle braked by gear change 3. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +

from “D1” to “D2”. OFF vehicle 4. High clutch AT-410 +
AT-362,
5. Low one-way clutch AT-363
AT-363
Vehicle braked by gear change ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 +

from “D2” to “D3”. OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-440 +
AT-116
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 + EM

Vehicle braked by gear change 2. Overrun clutch AT-415 +
from “D3” to “D4”. OFF vehicle 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 + LC

EC
FE
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252

CL
Maximum speed not attained.
Acceleration poor. MT

OFF vehicle
10. Oil pump AT-387 + AX

1. Fluid level AT-86 + SU

EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE BR
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
ON vehicle
ST
Failure to change gear from “D4” 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-273
to “D3”.
RS

BT
OFF vehicle
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-117
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Failure to change gear from “D3”
to “D2” or from “D4” to “D2”. 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252

OFF vehicle
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION

Failure to change gear from “D2”
to “D1” or from “D3” to “D1”. 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-154 AT-258
AT-362,
AT-363
OFF vehicle
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Gear change shock felt during
SENSOR” SENSOR”
deceleration by releasing accelera- ON vehicle
tor pedal. 2. Line pressure test AT-90 +
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-273
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
Too high a change point from “D4” 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE
to “D3”, from “D3” to “D2”, from ON vehicle POSITION POSITION
“D2” to “D1”. SENSOR” SENSOR”

AT-118
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
EC-122, EC-639, EM
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION LC
Kickdown does not operate when SENSOR” SENSOR”
depressing pedal in “D4” within ON vehicle
kickdown vehicle speed.
EC

FE
sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-137 AT-286 CL
EC-122, EC-639,
Kickdown operates or engine over- “DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
runs when depressing pedal in 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE
MT
ON vehicle
“D4” beyond kickdown vehicle POSITION POSITION
speed limit. SENSOR” SENSOR”

AX
EC-122, EC-639, SU
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
ON vehicle SENSOR” SENSOR” BR
Races extremely fast or slips in
changing from “D4” to “D3” when 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +
depressing pedal.
ST
RS
OFF vehicle
BT
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120 HA
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR” SC
ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in
changing from “D4” to “D2” when
depressing pedal. 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245 EL

IDX
OFF vehicle
AT-119
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +
changing from “D3” to “D2” when 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245
depressing pedal.
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Races extremely fast or slips in 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +

changing from “D4” or “D3” to “D1”
when depressing pedal. 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-182 AT-245
7. Forward one-way clutch AT-426 +

OFF vehicle
AT-362,
AT-363

ON vehicle

Vehicle will not run in any position.

OFF vehicle
10. Parking components AT-449 +
Transmission noise in “D”, “2”, “1” ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 +

and “R” positions. OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-369 +
AT-120
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
1. PNP switch adjustment AT-355 + EM

EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120 LC
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
EC
Failure to change from “D3” to “22” ON vehicle 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-160 AT-273
when changing lever into “2” posi-
tion. FE
AT-331
6. Control valve assembly AT-354 + CL

8. Brake band AT-440 + MT

OFF vehicle
Gear change from “22” to “23” in

ON vehicle 1. PNP switch adjustment AT-355 +
“2” position.

AX
EC-122, EC-639, SU
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
BR
ON vehicle
Engine brake does not operate in
“1” position. 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-132, AT-201,
AT-333 sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-137 AT-286 ST
6. Control valve assembly AT-354 + RS

8. Overrun clutch AT-415 + BT

OFF vehicle

HA
Gear change from “11” to “12” in
ON vehicle
“1” position. 2. Control cable adjustment AT-355 +
SC
EL
IDX
AT-121
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East

ON vehicle
Does not change from “12” to “11”
in “1” position. 4. Control valve assembly AT-354 +

OFF vehicle
Large shock changing from “12” to ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-354 +
“11” in “1” position. OFF vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-422 +

Speed and Speed and
ing” ing”
EC-122, EC-639,
ON vehicle “DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”

Transmission overheats.

OFF vehicle
AT-122
Reference Page
General and GI
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia & MA
the Middle
East
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 + EM

3. High clutch AT-410 + LC

ATF shoots out during operation.
White smoke emitted from exhaust 4. Brake band AT-440 +
pipe during operation. OFF vehicle EC

FE
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-86 +

CL

MT
Offensive smell at fluid charging
pipe. OFF vehicle
7. Forward clutch AT-415 + AX

9. Low & reverse brake AT-422 + SU

EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) THROTTLE THROTTLE BR
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
ST
ON vehicle 3. PNP switch adjustment AT-355 + RS

Torque converter is not locked up.
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-171 AT-195 BT

7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-165 AT-239

HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-123
Reference Page
General and
except for
EURO-OBD
Australia &
the Middle
East
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”
ON vehicle
Torque converter clutch piston slip. 3. Line pressure test AT-90 +
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
Lock-up point is extremely high or SENSOR” SENSOR”
low. ON vehicle
AT-326 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution AT-132, AT-201,
EC-122, EC-639,
“DTC P0120 “DTC P0120
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR” SENSOR”

ON vehicle sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-137 AT-286
A/T does not shift to “D4” when
driving with overdrive control 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252
switch “ON”.

OFF vehicle

Engine is stopped at “R”, “D”, “2”
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-148 AT-252
and “1” positions.
AT-124
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
TCM Terminals and Reference Value NJAT0030

PREPARATION
I Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48
NJAT0030S01
GI
by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.
MA
EM
SAT216J LC
TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT NJAT0030S02
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT999J
TCM INSPECTION TABLE NJAT0030S03

(Data are reference values.)
Judgement AX
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition standard
No.
(Approx.)
SU
When releasing accelerator pedal
1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure after warming up engine.
1 R/W
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal BR
0V
fully after warming up engine.
Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal

5 - 14V ST
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 P/B
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) fully after warming up engine.
0V RS
When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V
Torque converter BT
3 GY/R clutch solenoid
valve
When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V
HA
5 *2 Y/R — — —
6 *2 Y/G — — —
SC
7 *2 Y/B — — —
8*2 BR/W — — — EL
9*2 G/Y — — —
When turning ignition switch to

Battery voltage
IDX
“ON”.
10 BR/R Power source
0V
“OFF”.
AT-125
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve A oper-

ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in “D1” or “D4”.)
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.)
When shift solenoid valve B oper-

12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 0V
When setting overdrive control or

O/D OFF or A/T 0V
A/T check switch in “OFF” position.
13 G/R check indicator
lamp When setting overdrive control or
Battery voltage
A/T check switch in “ON” position.
15*2 PU — — —

after warming up engine.
I Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45 — General
Battery voltage
& except for EURO-OBD, Austra-
lia & the Middle East.
I Refer to “TCM SELF DIAGNOS-
Closed throttle TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”,
position switch AT-69 — Euro-OBD.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle posi- When depressing accelerator pedal
tion switch) after warming up engine.
I Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45 — General
0V
& except for EURO-OBD, Austra-
lia & the Middle East.
I Refer to “TCM SELF DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”,
AT-69 — Euro-OBD.
Wide open When depressing accelerator pedal

throttle position more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
17 LG switch up engine.
(in throttle posi- When releasing accelerator pedal
tion switch) 0V
19 BR/R Power source Same as No. 10
When overrun clutch solenoid valve

Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
AT-126
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) GI
When setting overdrive control or
Battery voltage
Overdrive control A/T check switch in “ON” position MA
22 OR/B or A/T check
switch When setting overdrive control or
0V
A/T check switch in “OFF” position EM
25 B Ground — —
When setting selector lever to “1”

Battery voltage
LC
PNP switch “1” position.
26 BR/Y
position When setting selector lever to other
positions.
0V EC
Battery voltage
PNP switch “2” position. FE
27 L
0V
positions.
CL
Battery voltage
“OFF”.
28 R/B
Power source
or
MT
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH),

use the CONSULT-II pulse fre-
quency measuring function.*1
AX
CAUTION:
Connect the diagnosis data link 150 Hz
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis SU
connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used
to test this item. BR
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
ST
30 *3 G/B — — —
31 *3 GY/L — — — RS
Throttle position
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source) BT
When setting selector lever to “D”
Battery voltage
position.
34 W/G
PNP switch “D” HA
0V
positions.
SC
When setting selector lever to “R”
Battery voltage
PNP switch “R” position.
35 G/W
position When setting selector lever to other EL
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N” or IDX

Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or “P” position.
36 G
“P” position When setting selector lever to other
0V
positions.
AT-127
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
I Refer to EC-267, “Idle Speed and

Ignition Timing” — General &
Engine speed except for EURO-OBD, Australia
39 L/OR —
signal & the Middle East.
I Refer to EC-985 “Idle Speed and
Ignition Timing — EURO-OBD”.
Voltage varies
Vehicle speed When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less
40 PU/R
sensor (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 1V and more
than 4.5V
When depressing accelerator pedal Fully-closed

Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. throttle: 0.5V
41 GY
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open
to throttle position.) throttle: 4V
Throttle position
42 B sensor — —
(Ground)
When depressing brake pedal. Battery voltage

45 R/Y Stop lamp switch
When releasing brake pedal. 0V
When ATF temperature is 20°C

1.5V
A/T fluid tempera- (68°F).
47 BR
ture sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C
0.5V
(176°F).
48 B Ground — —
*2: These terminals are connected to the ECM (Terminal No. 15 is for EURO-OBD only).
*3: These terminals are connected to the data link connector.
AT-128
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN NJAT0031
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT090
AT-129
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NJAT0031S01
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Judgement stan-
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition dard
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
“ON”.
0V
“OFF”.
25 B Ground — —

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
Battery voltage
“ON”.
48 B Ground — —
Diagnostic Procedure NJAT0231
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
SAT611J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.
AT-130
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2

1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. GI
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
SAT612JA
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © GO TO 3.
CL
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
Check the following items: MT
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28 (Main harness)
I Fuse
I Ignition switch
Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
OK or NG
AX
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.
SU
4 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. BR
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram — AT — MAIN.
Continuity should exist. ST
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG RS
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-131
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION
SENSOR) GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
Description NJAT0038
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear park-
ing pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent
to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
SAT357H

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

quency measuring function.*1
CAUTION:
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis
connector.
to test this item.
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
Throttle position
42 B sensor — —
(Ground)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NJAT0038S02
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause)
: VHCL SPEED SEN·AT I Harness or connectors

TCM does not receive the proper voltage
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
signal from the sensor.
: 1st judgement flicker I Revolution sensor
AT-132
Description (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
NJAT0038S04
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated. GI
1) Start engine. MA
2) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-
II.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions: EM
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 30
km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full
SAT014K
throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. LC
1) Start engine. EC
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full FE
throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis. CL
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45.
SAT806H
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-133
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NJAT0201
HAT091
AT-134
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II) GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT014K FE
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
CL
MT
AX
SAT614J
SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
BR
2 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (With CONSULT-II) ST

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
RS
BT
HA
SC
MTBL0575 EL
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 3.
AT-135
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Self-diagnosis Code confirmation procedure, AT-133.
OK or NG
NG © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK TCM INSPECTION

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
OK or NG
AT-136
VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revo- GI
lution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
MA
EM
SAT059K LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
Voltage varies
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3
40 PU/R
Vehicle speed sen-
km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or
between less CL
sor than 1V and
more.
more than 4.5V
MT
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) AX
: 2nd judgement flicker I Vehicle speed sensor
SU
BR

NJAT0079S04
ST
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II RS
NJAT0079S0401
1) Start engine.
2) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT- BT
II.
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 20 HA
km/h (12 MPH).
SAT014K
Without CONSULT-II NJAT0079S0402 SC
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 20 EL
km/h (12 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without IDX
SAT807H
AT-137
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR NJAT0215
HAT076
AT-138
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT614J
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
MT
Voltage:
Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V.
AX
SU
BR
SAT465JA
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
RS
NG © Check the following items:
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
Refer to EL-182, “METERS AND GAUGES”. BT
I Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)
HA
2 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
SC
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. EL
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
IDX
AT-139
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
I Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
I Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
throttle position switch.
The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the
TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full
throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a
SAT004K signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE NJAT0070S01
Monitor item Condition Specification
Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V

Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Refer to “Preparation”, “SELF-DI- Battery voltage
Closed throttle AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without
position switch CONSULT-II)”, AT-45.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle posi- When depressing accelerator pedal
tion switch) after warming up engine.
Refer to “Preparation”, “SELF-DI- 0V
AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without
Wide open When depressing accelerator pedal

throttle position more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
17 LG switch up engine.
(in throttle posi- When releasing accelerator pedal
tion switch) 0V
Throttle position
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source)
Fully-closed
When depressing accelerator pedal throttle:
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V
41 GY
to throttle position.) throttle:
4V
Ground
42 B (Throttle position — —
sensor)
AT-140
THROTTLE POSITION
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) GI
: THROTTLE POSI SEN I Harness or connectors
TCM receives an excessively low or high (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: 3rd judgement flicker voltage from the sensor. I Throttle position sensor MA
EM
LC
NJAT0070S05
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the EC
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
NJAT0070S0501
FE
II. CL
SAT014K
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full MT
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 AX
3) Perform self-diagnosis. SU
BR
SAT808H
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-141
THROTTLE POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS NJAT0212
HAT078
AT-142
THROTTLE POSITION
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM GI

I Check P code with CONSULT-II “ENGINE”.
Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-47, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”. MA
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 2. EM
OK (Without CONSULT- © GO TO 3.
II)
LC
NG © Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-122, “DTC P0120
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”.
EC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II FE
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener then check the following. Refer from step 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)”, AT-45.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. CL
3. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
MT
AX
SU
SAT014K
4. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”. BR
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V ST
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT614J
OK or NG EL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen- IDX
sor circuit. (Main harness)
AT-143
THROTTLE POSITION
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
SAT453J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen-
AT-144
THROTTLE POSITION
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II GI
3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
EM
LC
MTBL0011
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following items: AX
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-147.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main
harness) SU
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-145
THROTTLE POSITION
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
(After warming up engine)
MTBL0577
SAT454JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
harness)
6 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
nector.
AT-146
THROTTLE POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection =NJAT0072

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position)
NJAT0072S01
GI
NJAT0072S0101
I Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5.
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity
MA
Released Yes
EM
Depressed No
SAT851JA I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-65, “Basic LC

Inspection”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch NJAT0072S0102
Released No AX
Depressed Yes
SU
BR
SAT852JA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-147
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and
throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum
position.
SAT322GC
Gear position 1 2 3 4
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)
Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

11 L/W
not operate. 0V
: SHIFT SOLENOID/VA TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors

when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
: 4th judgement flicker valve. I Shift solenoid valve A
AT-148
SHIFT SOLENOID
NJAT0064S04
1) Start engine. MA
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 position. EM
SAT014K
1) Start engine. LC
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 position.
3) Perform self-diagnosis. EC
FE
CL
SAT809H
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-149
SHIFT SOLENOID
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A NJAT0210
HAT079
AT-150
SHIFT SOLENOID
1 CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE GI

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. MA
Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT900JA
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. MT
2. Check the following items:
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-153.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-151
SHIFT SOLENOID
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11.
SAT901JB
4. Reinstall any part removed.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-152
SHIFT SOLENOID
Component Inspection NJAT0066

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
I For removal, refer to AT-354.
NJAT0066S01
GI
Resistance Check
I Check resistance between two terminals.
NJAT0066S0101
MA
Resistance
Solenoid valve Terminal No.
(Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT021K
MT
Operation Check NJAT0066S0102
I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal and ground.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT022K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-153
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
position.
SAT322GC

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
: SHIFT SOLENOID/VB TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors

: 5th judgement flicker valve. I Shift solenoid valve B
AT-154
SHIFT SOLENOID
NJAT0067S04
1) Start engine. MA
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position. EM
SAT014K
1) Start engine. LC
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position.
3) Perform self-diagnosis. EC
FE
CL
SAT812H
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-155
SHIFT SOLENOID
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B NJAT0211
HAT080
AT-156
SHIFT SOLENOID

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT904JA
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-157
SHIFT SOLENOID

SAT905JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-158
SHIFT SOLENOID

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
NJAT0069S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0069S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT023K
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT024K
SC
EL
IDX
AT-159
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive con-
trol switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The over-
run clutch operation will then be controlled.
SAT322GC

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
: OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: 6th judgement flicker valve. I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

NJAT0073S04
1) Start engine.
II.
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF”
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF”
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
SAT815H
AT-160
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV NJAT0213
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT081
AT-161
1 CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE

3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
SAT908JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354.
AT-162

Continuity should exist. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT909JA AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. BR
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-163

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE NJAT0075S01
Resistance Check NJAT0075S0101
Resistance
(Approx.)
Overrun clutch
3 Ground 20 - 30Ω
solenoid valve
SAT910JA

SAT911JA
AT-164
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
Description
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the GI
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston opera-
tion will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tempera- MA
ture is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is EM
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT322GC LC
MODE
NJAT0055S01 EC
FE
Lock-up “OFF” Approximately 4%
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
" "
duty
Lock-up “ON” Approximately 94%
CL
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. MT
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Torque converter AX
valve When A/T does not perform lock-
0V
up.
SU
BR
: T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ST
: 7th judgement flicker valve. I T/C clutch solenoid valve
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-165
NJAT0055S05
1) Start engine.
II.
3) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up position.
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up position.
SAT818H
AT-166
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV NJAT0207
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT082
AT-167

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
SAT889JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-354.
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-168

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT890JA AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-169

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENJAT0057S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Torque converter
clutch solenoid 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve
SAT025K

SAT026K
AT-170
BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE) GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM. GI
MA
EM
SAT283HC LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT021J
MT
MODE NJAT0076S01
Monitor item Condition Specification (Approximately) AX

Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ
A/T fluid temperature sensor " " "
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ SU
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NJAT0076S02
BR
Judgement
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item Condition standard ST
(Approx.)

“ON”.
Battery voltage RS
0V
“OFF”. BT
When turning ignition switch to HA

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
SC
Battery voltage
“ON”.
Ground
EL
42 B (A/T fluid tempera- — —
ture sensor)
IDX
1.5V
47 BR
0.5V
(176°F).
AT-171
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN I Harness or connectors

TCM receives an excessively low or high
voltage from the sensor.
: 8th judgement flicker I A/T fluid temperature sensor

NJAT0076S05
1) Start engine.
II.
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open
SAT014K
position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for
more than 10 minutes.
1) Start engine.
km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open
position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for
more than 10 minutes.
SAT821H
AT-172
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS NJAT0214
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT083
AT-173
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

Voltage:
Battery voltage
Voltage:
Battery voltage
SAT461J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
I Ignition switch and fuse
AT-174
2 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

3. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold.
Resistance: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
Approximately 2.5 kΩ
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT912JA
CL
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II) © GO TO 3.
MT
II)
NG © 1. Remove oil pan.
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-177. AX
SU
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. BR
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage: ST
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT614J
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following item: IDX
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and terminal cord assembly (Main har-
ness)
I Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-102, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”.
AT-175
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
SAT463J
SAT464J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following item:
ness)
5 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-176

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NJAT0078S01
GI
I Check resistance between two terminals while changing tem-
perature as shown at left. MA
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance
20 (68) Approximately 2.5 kΩ EM

80 (176) Approximately 0.3 kΩ
SAT298F LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-177
ENGINE SPEED
SIGNAL GEN&EXC. F/EURO-OBD, AUS&ME
Description
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Engine speed Refer to EC-91, “ECM INSPECTION

39 L/OR —
signal TABLE”.
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)
: ENGINE SPEED SIG TCM does not receive the proper voltage I Harness or connectors
: 9th judgement flicker signal from ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

NJAT0041S04
1) Start engine.
II.
SAT014K
1) Start engine.
SAT823H
AT-178
ENGINE SPEED
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS NJAT0202
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT095
AT-179
ENGINE SPEED
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG
II)
NG © Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-181, “DTC P1320 IGNITION
SIGNAL”.
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
SAT645J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
I Resistor and ignition coil
Refer to EC-181, “DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”.
AT-180
ENGINE SPEED
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (Without CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II GI
1. Start engine.
Voltage (Idle speed): MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT424JA
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. CL
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM MT
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Self-diagnosis Code confirmation procedure, AT-178. AX
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END SU
nector. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-181
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID
Description
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”.
SAT283HC

MODE NJAT0061S01
Small throttle opening

(Low line pressure) Approximately 24%
Line pressure solenoid valve duty " "
Large throttle opening Approximately 95%
(High line pressure)
NOTE:
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure sole- after warming up engine.
1 R/W
noid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V

Line pressure sole- 5 - 14V
2 P/B noid valve (with
dropping resistor) When depressing accelerator pedal
0V
: LINE PRESSURE S/V TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: 10th judgement flicker valve. I Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-182
NJAT0061S05
1) Start engine. MA
II.
3) With brake pedal depressed, shift the lever from “P” , “N” , EM
“D” , “N” , “P” positions.
SAT014K Without CONSULT-II NJAT0061S0502
LC
1) Start engine.
2) With brake pedal depressed, shift the lever from “P” , “N” ,
“D” , “N” , “P” positions. EC
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without FE
CL
SAT824H
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-183
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV NJAT0209
HAT096
AT-184

Resistance:
2.5 - 5Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT895JA
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
I Line pressure solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-185

3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 2.
Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
SAT896JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I Dropping resistor
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main
harness)
AT-186

Resistance:
Approx. 0Ω MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT897JA AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-187

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE NJAT0063S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Line pressure
4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
SAT898JA

SAT899JA
DROPPING RESISTOR NJAT0063S02

Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
SAT003K
AT-188
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH EURO-OBD
Description
I The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range
switch. GI
I The transmission range switch detects the selector lever posi-
tion and sends a signal to the TCM.
MA
EM
SAT088JA LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
Battery voltage
26 BR/Y CL
0V
positions.

MT
Battery voltage
27 L
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “D”

position.
Battery voltage AX
PNP switch “D”
34 W/G
0V
positions. SU
When setting selector lever to “R”
Battery voltage
position.
35 G/W
PNP switch “R” BR
0V
positions.
When setting selector lever to “N”

ST
Battery voltage
PNP switch “N” or or “P” position.
36 G
“P” position When setting selector lever to other RS
0V
positions.

BT
: PNP SW/CIRC I Harness or connectors

HA
TCM does not receive the correct voltage
(The PNP switch circuit is open or
signal from the switch based on the gear
: P0705 shorted.)
position.
I PNP switch SC
EL
IDX
AT-189
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NJAT0264S03
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-
II.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)
With GST
SAT020K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-190
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW NJAT0265
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT099
AT-191
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
SAT014K
3. Read out “P/N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position.
Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.
SAT701J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I PNP switch
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
I Diode (P, N positions)
AT-192
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each posi- MA
tion.
Voltage:
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0136 FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT425J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
BT
I PNP switch HA
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) SC
I Diode (P, N positions) EL
IDX
AT-193
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-190.
OK or NG
nector.

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH NJAT0267S01
1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3 and between ter-
minals 2 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
Lever position Terminal No.
P 3—7 1—2
R 3—8
N 3—9 1—2
D 3—6
2 3—5
1 3—4
SAT402JB
2. If NG, check again with control cable disconnected from

manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust control cable. Refer to Refer to “TCM
SELF-DIAGNOSITIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-69.
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check con-
tinuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-355.
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SAT089JA
AT-194
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT EURO-OBD
Description
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT021J
MT
MODE NJAT0268S01

Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ SU
BR

NJAT0268S02 ST
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item Condition dard RS
(Approx.)
Throttle position
42 B sensor — —
BT
(Ground)

1.5V
HA
47 BR
(176°F).
0.5V SC
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NJAT0268S03 EL

: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC I Harness or connectors IDX

: P0710 I A/T fluid temperature sensor
AT-195
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II.
10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continu-
ously.)
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
SAT020K
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”.
AT-196
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS NJAT0269
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT100
AT-197
1 INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SAT014K
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 5.
AT-198
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Without CONSULT-II)

1. Start engine.
Voltage: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT937J
4. Disconnect TCM harness connector. CL
5. Check continuity between terminal 42 and ground.
MT
AX
SU
SAT421J
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. ST
NG © GO TO 5.
RS
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-196. BT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END HA
nector. SC
EL
IDX
AT-199

Resistance:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
SAT880JA
OK or NG
II)

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NJAT0271S01
perature as shown at left.

SAT298F
AT-200
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION
SENSOR) EURO-OBD
Description
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear park-
ing pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent GI
to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
MA
EM
SAT357H LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
quency measuring function.*1 CL
CAUTION:
29 W Revolution sensor cable to the vehicle diagnosis MT
connector.
to test this item.
Under 1.3V or
When vehicle parks.
over 4.5V
AX
Throttle position
42 B sensor — — SU
(Ground)
BR
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) ST
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT I Harness or connectors
: P0720 signal from the sensor.
I Revolution sensor RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-201
SENSOR) EURO-OBD
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
SAT014K the next test.
With CONSULT-II
for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”
value increase.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-287.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SAT971J 3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-
II.
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
AT-204.
SAT014K
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
With GST
SAT020K
AT-202
SENSOR) EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NJAT0273
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT091
AT-203
SENSOR) EURO-OBD

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
MTBL0581
I Harness for short or open between TCM, ECM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
AT-204
SENSOR) EURO-OBD
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-202. GI
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END MA
NG © GO TO 4.
EM
4 CHECK TCM INSPECTION
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. LC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-205
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL EURO-OBD
Description
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Engine speed Refer to EC-603, “ECM INSPECTION

39 L/OR —
signal TABLE”.
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)
: ENGINE SPEED SIG TCM does not receive the proper voltage I Harness or connectors
: P0725 signal from ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
With GST
SAT020K
AT-206
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS NJAT0277
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT095
AT-207

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self- diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG
II)
NG © Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-943, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
SAT014K
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
SAT645J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
Refer to EC-943, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.
AT-208
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (Without CONSULT-II)

1. Start engine.
Voltage (Idle speed): MA
Refer to EC-985, “Idle Speed and Ignition Timing”.
EM
LC
EC
SAT424JC
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. CL
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM MT
Refer to EC-943, “IGNITION SIGNAL”.
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-206. AX
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END SU
nector. BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-209
DTC P0731 A/T 1ST GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi-
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

11 L/W
not operate. 0V

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC NJAT0279S02

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc-
tion.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A
is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2* 2 3 3
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4* 3 3 4
*: P0731 is detected.
AT-210
: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A GI

A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear I Shift solenoid valve B
: P0731 position even if electrical circuit is good. I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit MA
EM
LC
PROCEDURE NJAT0279S03 EC
CAUTION:
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the FE
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- CL
SAT014K the next test. MT
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
malfunction is eliminated. AX
With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT-II. SU
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V BR
SAT971J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid). ST
3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. RS
4) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely. BT
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) HA
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 SC
to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to EL
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-214.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the
following step.
IDX
I Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelera-
tor pedal to WOT.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “ENGINE”. In case a
AT-211
1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
Vehicle condition
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists 1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0731 2,2,3,3

exists. 4,3,3,4
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer

to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-214.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-473.
With GST
AT-212
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST NJAT0280
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT101
AT-213
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
SAT881JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
AT-214
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-391. GI
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. MA
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT367H
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair control valve assembly. MT
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG AX
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. SU
BR
Component Inspection NJAT0282 ST

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B NJAT0282S01
RS
Resistance
BT
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 20 - 30Ω
HA
valve A
Ground
Shift solenoid
valve B
1 5 - 20Ω SC
EL
IDX
SAT050KA
AT-215
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
SAT883JB
AT-216
DTC P0732 A/T 2ND GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis. GI
MA
second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not
caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but EM
by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
LC
EC
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NJAT0283S01 FE

Judgement stan-
Terminal
Wire color Item Condition dard CL
No.
(Approx.)
When shift solenoid valve B oper- MT

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
AX
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: SU
B: Engine speed signal from ECM BR
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) sup-
posed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the
ST
ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis mal-
function. RS
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
open.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 BT
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4 3* 3 4

HA
SC
: A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear
I Shift solenoid valve B EL
I Each clutch
position even if electrical circuit is good.
: P0732 I Hydraulic control circuit
IDX
AT-217
CAUTION:
tachometer.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
of test.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
SAT971J
the fluid).
3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”.
pletely.
4)
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31
to 34 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
tor pedal to WOT.
6) Stop vehicle.
Vehicle condition
Malfunction for P0732

4,3,3,4
exists.
AT-218
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-221. GI
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-219
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND NJAT0284
HAT102
AT-220
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE GI

I Shift solenoid valve B MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT884JB
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-391.
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. RS
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT367H IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair control valve assembly.
AT-221
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B NJAT0286S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
SAT051KA

SAT884JB
AT-222
DTC P0733 A/T 3RD GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis. GI
MA
third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by EM
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston
or brake band, etc. LC
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) EC

FE
Judgement stan- CL
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
MT
11 L/W
not operate. 0V
(When driving in “D2” or “D3”.) AX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC
NJAT0287S02
SU
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor BR
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed
ST
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc- RS
tion.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck
closed. BT
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 HA

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed 1 1 4* 4
*: P0733 is detected. SC
EL
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear
I Each clutch
: P0733 I Hydraulic control circuit IDX
AT-223
CAUTION:
tachometer.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
of test.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
SAT971J
the fluid).
3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
pletely.
4)
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to
following step.
tor pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
6) Stop vehicle.
Vehicle condition
No malfunction exists. 1,2,3,4
Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1,1,4,4
AT-224
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-227. GI
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-225
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD NJAT0288
HAT103
AT-226
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE GI

I Shift solenoid valve A MA
Refer to “Component Inspection” below.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT886JA
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 2.
BR
ST
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-391.
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT367H IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair control valve assembly.
AT-227
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A NJAT0290S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
SAT052KA

SAT886JB
AT-228
DTC P0734 A/T 4TH GEAR FUNCTION EURO-OBD
Description
self-diagnosis. GI
MA
fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not
lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by elec- EM
trical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical
malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid
valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter LC
clutch, etc.
EC
Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) FE

MODE NJAT0291S01
CL

MT
AX
Judgement stan-
SU
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
BR
1.5 - 2.5V
1 R/W ST
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V

5 - 14V
RS
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 P/B
resistor) fully after warming up engine.
0V BT
ates. Battery voltage HA
11 L/W
not operate. 0V
SC
When shift solenoid valve B oper- EL

12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does IDX
not operate. 0V
AT-229
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
closed.
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1*
: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A

A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear
: P0734 I Each clutch
AT-230
CAUTION: GI
I If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least MA
5 seconds before continuing.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the EM
tachometer.
NOTE:
SAT014K If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- LC
the next test. EC
TESTING CONDITION:
of test. FE
CL
With CONSULT-II
SAT971J
CONSULT-II. MT
the fluid). AX
3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SU
pletely. BR
SAT021J THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”) ST
I Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 RS
MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to BT
following step. HA
tor pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
SC
1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable EL
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting IDX
AT-231

Vehicle condition
Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1,2,2,1

Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-234.
With GST
AT-232
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH NJAT0292
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT104
AT-233

During “Cruise test — Part 1” (AT-101), does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
SAT988H
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test.
Refer to AT-90.
MTBL0507
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 6.
AT-234
3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES

1. Remove control valve assembly. GI
Refer to AT-354.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-238.
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT847JB
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly. SU
4 CHECK CONTROL VALVE BR

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-391.
2. Check to ensure that: ST
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT367H
OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair control valve.
AT-235

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-354.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-238.
SAT888JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.
AT-236

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. GI
Refer to AT-391.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve MA
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT367H
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair control valve. MT

Yes or No AX
Yes © GO TO 9.
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. SU
9 CHECK DTC
BR
OK or NG
ST
NG © Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this test group.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-237

SOLENOID VALVES NJAT0294S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Shift solenoid
2 20 - 30Ω
valve A
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
Line pressure
4 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
SAT848JB

SAT847JB
AT-238
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the GI
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston opera-
tion will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tempera- MA
ture is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is EM
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT322GC LC
MODE
NJAT0295S01 EC
FE
Lock-up “OFF” Approximately 4%
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
" "
duty
Lock-up “ON” Approximately 94%
CL
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. MT
Judgement
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Torque converter AX
valve When A/T does not perform lock-
0V
up.
SU
BR
: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ST
: P0740 valve. I T/C clutch solenoid valve
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-239
VALVE EURO-OBD
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CON-
SULT-II and wait at least 1 second.
With GST
SAT020K
AT-240
VALVE EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV NJAT0296
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT082
AT-241
VALVE EURO-OBD

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
SAT889JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-354.
AT-242
VALVE EURO-OBD

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT890JB AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-243
VALVE EURO-OBD

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENJAT0298S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Torque converter
clutch solenoid 5 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve
SAT053KA

SAT054KA
AT-244
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent GI
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line MA
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”. EM
SAT322GC LC
MODE
NJAT0299S01 EC
FE
CL
NOTE: MT
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.

Terminal
Judgement stan- AX
No.
(Approx.)
When releasing accelerator pedal SU

1.5 - 2.5V
1 R/W
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0V BR

5 - 14V ST
solenoid valve
2 P/B
resistor) 0V
fully after warming up engine. RS
BT
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors

when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) HA
: P0745 valve. I Line pressure solenoid valve
SC
EL
IDX
AT-245
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 sec-
ond.
With GST
SAT020K
AT-246
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV NJAT0300
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT096
AT-247

Resistance:
2.5 - 5Ω
SAT895JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AT-248

Resistance: MA
10 - 15Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT896JB
OK or NG
SU
OK © GO TO 3.
I Dropping resistor BR
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main
harness) ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-249

Resistance:
Approx. 0Ω
SAT897JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
4 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-250

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
NJAT0302S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0302S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Line pressure
4 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
solenoid valve
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT898JB
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT899JB
DROPPING RESISTOR NJAT0302S02

SC
Resistance:
10 - 15Ω
EL
IDX
SAT003K
AT-251
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A EURO-OBD
Description
position.
SAT322GC

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

11 L/W
not operate. 0V
: SFT SOL A/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0750 valve. I Shift solenoid valve A
AT-252
CAUTION: GI
NOTE:
MA
the next test.
EM
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated. LC
With CONSULT-II
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. EC
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift FE
“1” , “2” (“GEAR”).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. CL
SAT020K
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-253
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A NJAT0304
HAT079
AT-254

Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT900JB
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-255

SAT901JC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-256

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
NJAT0306S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0306S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid
2 Ground 20 - 30Ω
valve A
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT056KA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT903JB
SC
EL
IDX
AT-257
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B EURO-OBD
Description
position.
SAT322GC

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

12 L/Y
not operate. 0V
: SFT SOL B/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0755 valve. I Shift solenoid valve B
AT-258
CAUTION: GI
NOTE:
MA
the next test.
EM
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated. LC
With CONSULT-II
for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. EC
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift FE
1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”).
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. CL
SAT020K
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-259
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B NJAT0308
HAT080
AT-260

Resistance:
5 - 20Ω
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT904JB
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-261

SAT905JD
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-262

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
NJAT0310S01
GI
Resistance Check
NJAT0310S0101
MA
Resistance
(Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid
1 Ground 5 - 20Ω
valve B
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT057KA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT907JB
SC
EL
IDX
AT-263
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR EURO-OBD
Description
I Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the
SAT004K signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.
MODE NJAT0311S01
Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V

Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)

Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF- Battery voltage
Closed throttle DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No
position switch Tools)”, AT-69.
16 Y/PU
(in throttle position When depressing accelerator pedal
switch) after warming up engine.
Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF- 0V
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No
Tools)”, AT-69.
When depressing accelerator pedal

Wide open throttle more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
position switch up engine.
17 LG
(in throttle position
switch) When releasing accelerator pedal
0V
Throttle position
32 R sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source)
Fully-closed
When depressing accelerator pedal throttle:
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V
41 GY
to throttle position.) throttle:
4V
Ground
42 B (Throttle position — —
sensor)
AT-264
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check items (Possible cause) GI
: TP SEN/CIRC A/T I Harness or connectors
TCM receives an excessively low or high (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: P1705 voltage from the sensor. I Throttle position sensor MA
EM
LC
PROCEDURE NJAT0311S04 EC
CAUTION:
NOTE: FE
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting CL
the next test.
SAT014K malfunction is eliminated. MT
With CONSULT-II
1) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.
Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-69.
2) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode AX
3) Check the following.
SU
Accelerator pedal
THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW
condition
Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF

BR
SAT971J
Partially
0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF
depressed ST
Fully depressed 1.9 - 4.6V OFF ON

RS
AT-268.
If the check result is OK, go to following step. BT
5) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least HA
SAT014K
3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more SC
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EL
AT-268.
6) Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive IDX
seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
SAT020K
AT-265
With GST
AT-266
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS NJAT0312
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT093
AT-267

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control.
Refer to EC-550, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”.
OK or NG
II)
NG © Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-639, “DTC P0120
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”.
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener then check the following. Refer from step 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DI-
AGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-69.
SAT014K
4. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V
SAT614J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen-
AT-268
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. MA
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
EM
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
LC
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position)
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT453J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen- AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-269
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
MTBL0011
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
harness)
AT-270
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

1. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
2. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. MA
EM
LC
MTBL0137
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT454JB ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. RS
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main BT
harness)
HA
6 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-265. SC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EL
nector.
IDX
AT-271

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH NJAT0314S01
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position) NJAT0314S0101
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
DURE (No Tools)”, AT-69.]
Released Yes
SAT851JA Depressed No
I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-803, “DTC

P0510 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH”.
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch NJAT0314S0102

Released No
Depressed Yes
SAT852JA
AT-272
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE EURO-OBD
Description
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive con- GI
trol switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The over-
run clutch operation will then be controlled.
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC
EC
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.) FE
Battery voltage
operates.
20 L/B
Overrun clutch CL
solenoid valve
0V
does not operate.
MT
: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P1760 valve. I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
AX
SU
BR

PROCEDURE ST
NJAT0315S03
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. RS
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition BT
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: HA
SAT014K Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the SC
With CONSULT-II EL
2) Start engine. IDX
3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 MPH)
with “D” position (OD “ON”).
4) Release accelerator pedal completely with “D” position (OD
SAT020K “OFF”).
AT-273
With GST
AT-274
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV NJAT0316
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT081
AT-275

Resistance:
20 - 30Ω
SAT908JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AT-276

EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT909JB AX
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC ST
OK or NG RS
BT
nector.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-277

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE NJAT0318S01
Resistance
(Approx.)
Overrun clutch
3 Ground 20 - 30Ω
solenoid valve
SAT910JB

SAT911JB
AT-278
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE) EURO-OBD
Description
MA
EM
SAT322GC LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT021J
MT
MODE NJAT0319S01

Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ
Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ SU
NJAT0319S02
BR
Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item Condition dard ST
(Approx.)

“ON”.
Battery voltage RS
0V
“OFF”. BT
When turning ignition switch to HA

Battery voltage
“OFF”.
Power source
28 R/B or
(Memory back-up)
SC
Battery voltage
“ON”.
Ground
EL
42 B (A/T fluid tem- — —
perature sensor)
IDX
1.5V
47 BR
0.5V
(176°F).
AT-279
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN I Harness or connectors

: 8th judgement flicker I A/T fluid temperature sensor

With CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II.
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12
MPH).
SAT014K
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine.
Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12
MPH).
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-69.
SAT971J
SAT335HC
AT-280
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS NJAT0320
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT094
AT-281

Voltage:
Battery voltage
Voltage:
Battery voltage
SAT461J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
AT-282

Resistance: MA
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT912JB
CL
OK or NG
MT
II)
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-285. AX
SU
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. BR
Voltage: ST
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT614J
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following item: IDX
ness)
AT-283
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
SAT463J
SAT464J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following item:
ness)
5 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-284

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NJAT0322S01
GI
perature as shown at left. MA
20 (68) Approximately 2.5 kΩ EM

SAT298F LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-285
DTC VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR EURO-OBD
Description
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revo-
lution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
SAT070K

Judgement stan-
Terminal
No.
(Approx.)
Voltage varies
Vehicle speed When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h between less
40 PU/R
sensor (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. than 1V and more
than 4.5V
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR I Harness or connectors

: 2nd judgement flicker I Vehicle speed sensor
AT-286
CAUTION: GI
I If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least MA
5 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the EM
With CONSULT-II
SAT014K
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode LC
2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 16
MPH). EC
Without CONSULT-II
1) Start engine. FE
Selector lever in “D” and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16
MPH). CL
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
SAT971J AT-69. MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT329HA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-287
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR NJAT0324
HAT129
AT-288
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT105
AT-289
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
SAT614J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Voltage:
Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V.
SAT465JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
Refer to EL-182, “METERS AND GAUGES”.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)
2 CHECK DTC
OK or NG
nector.
AT-290
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. GI
MA
EM
SAT574J LC
Diagnostic Trouble Code No. Malfunction is detected when .... Check Item (Possible Cause) EC
: CONTROL UNIT (RAM), TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is mal-
I TCM
CONTROL UNIT (ROM) functioning. FE
CL
MT
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition AX
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
SU
for A/T with CONSULT-II. BR
SAT014K 2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT971J

SC
1 INSPECTION START (WITH CONSULT-II)
With CONSULT-II EL
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
© GO TO 2.
IDX
AT-291
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
2 CHECK DTC
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See above.
© GO TO 3.
3 CHECK DTC AGAIN

Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM) or CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © Replace TCM.
No © INSPECTION END
AT-292
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. GI
MA
EM
SAT574J LC
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause) EC
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunction-
I TCM
ing. FE
CL
MT
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition AX
the next test.
With CONSULT-II
SU
for A/T with CONSULT-II. BR
SAT014K 2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT971J
SC
EL
IDX
AT-293
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
1 CHECK DTC
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAGNOSIS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
Yes © Replace TCM.
No © INSPECTION END
AT-294
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/General and Except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/General and

Except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle
East GI
NJAT0353
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT134
AT-295
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/General and Except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East (Cont’d)
HAT135
AT-296
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD NJAT0330
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT097
AT-297
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC/EURO-OBD (Cont’d)
HAT130
AT-298
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On =NJAT0331

SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp does not come on for GI
about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
MA
EM
SAT466JA LC
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. EC
Voltage: Battery voltage FE
CL
MT
SAT467J
AX
Voltage: Battery voltage SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. BR
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness).
ST
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-129.
I Ignition switch and fuse Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-299
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

3. Check continuity between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground.
SAT468J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Refer
to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-129.
3 CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT

2. Check resistance between TCM terminals 13 and 10.
Resistance: 50 - 100Ω
SAT469JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
I O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp.
Refer to EL-182, “METERS AND GAUGES”.
I Harness and fuse for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF or A/T check
indicator lamp (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between O/D OFF or A/T check indicator lamp and TCM.
AT-300
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-301
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N”

Position =NJAT0332
SYMPTOM:
I Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N”
position.
I Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1”
or “R” position.
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
SAT367J
Yes or No
Yes © Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)”, AT-337.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION

Check for short or open of PNP switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Refer to “21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit
Checks)”, AT-337.
SAT408JA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace PNP switch.
AT-302
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-13, “STARTING SYSTEM”. GI
OK or NG
EM
LC
3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Backward When Pushed NJAT0333
EC
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with
selector lever in “P” position. FE
1 CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components. Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-364, 365. CL
MT
AX
SAT282F SU
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-303
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves =NJAT0334

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” posi-
tion.
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
SAT367J
Yes or No
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CONTROL CABLE

Check control cable. Refer to AT-355.
SAT023JB
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-355.
AT-304
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)
3 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level again. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT638A
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
NG © Refill ATF.
CL
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition. MT
AX
SU
SAT171B BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © 1. Disassemble A/T.
I Forward clutch assembly RS
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Reverse clutch assembly
BT
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. HA
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END SC
nector.
EL
IDX
AT-305
5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position
5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position =NJAT0335

SYMPTOM:
There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor
circuit?
SAT345HA
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to the following items.
General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East
I LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE: AT-182
I THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR: AT-140
I BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER
SOURCE: AT-171
Euro-OBD
I LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE: AT-245
I THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR: AT-264
SOURCE: AT-279
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-122, “DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — General and except
for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/EC-639, “DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Euro-OBD
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
AT-306
5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position (Cont’d)

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-90. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT494G
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
CL
MT
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
AX
nector. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-307
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R”

Position =NJAT0336
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.
Check A/T fluid level again.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Refill ATF.
2 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.
Refer to “STALL TEST”, AT-86.
SAT493G
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
OK in “1” position, NG in © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-354.
“R” position 2. Check the following items:
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-182: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and
the Middle East/AT-245: Euro-OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
I High clutch assembly
I Low & reverse brake assembly
NG in both “1” and “R” © GO TO 6.
positions
AT-308
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-90. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT494G
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-354.
FE
CL
3. Disassemble A/T.
MT
4. Check the following item:
I Oil pump assembly

1. Remove oil pan.
AX
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT171B
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6. HA
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
SC
Check again.
OK or NG
EL
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- IDX
nector.
AT-309
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-354.
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-182: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-245: Euro-
OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
AT-310
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2”

Or “1” Position
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0337
GI
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1”
position. MA
Check A/T fluid level again.
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT638A
CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
MT
NG © Refill ATF.
2 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Stall Test”, AT-86.
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT493G
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 6. BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-311
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test ”, AT-90.
SAT494G
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following item:
I Oil pump assembly

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-312
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. GI
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve (AT-182: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-245: Euro- MA
OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Oil pump assembly
EM
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
LC
I Torque converter
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-313
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 =NJAT0338

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise test — Part 1.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position OK?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-308.

Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
SAT934FB
Yes or No
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-132
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-148
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B: AT-154
I VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR: AT-137
Euro-OBD
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-201
No © GO TO 3.
AT-314
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-122, “DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — General and except GI
for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/Refer to EC-639, “DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Euro-
OBD
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT004K
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor. CL

MT
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “Line Pressure Test”, AT-90.
AX
SU
SAT494G
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © GO TO 8.
RS
1. Remove oil pan. BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT171B
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.
AT-315
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)

I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.

I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
I Torque converter
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT-316
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not

Kickdown: D4 → D2
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0339
GI
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed.
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator MA
pedal fully at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 OK?
EM
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
LC
No © Go to 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and 8. Vehicle Can-
not Be Started From D1, AT-311, 314. EC
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT FE

With CONSULT-II
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT367J
Yes or No BR
ST
No © GO TO 3.
RS
3 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) AND CHECK VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-132 (General and BT
except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East), AT-201 (EURO-OBD) and AT-137 (General and except for Euro-
OBD, Australia and the Middle East), AT-286 (EURO-OBD).
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed SC
sensor·MTR circuits.
EL
IDX
AT-317
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)

OBD
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONIDITION

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-354.
I Shift valve A
I Shift solenoid valve A (AT-148: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-252: Euro-OBD)
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT-318
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM LC

I Shift valve A EC
I Shift solenoid valve A (AT-148: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-252: Euro-OBD)
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter FE
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Servo piston assembly CL
I Brake band
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 7.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-319
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 =NJAT0340

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and 8. Vehicle Can-
not Be Started From D1, AT-311, 314.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
SAT367J
Yes or No
No © GO TO 3.

OBD
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-320
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)

1. Remove oil pan. GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT171B
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
FE
NG © GO TO 7.
CL
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-354. MT
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B (AT-154: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-258: Euro-OBD)
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. SU
6 CHECK SYMPTOM BR
Check again.
OK or NG ST
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. RS
nector.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-321

I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B (AT-154: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and Middle East/AT-258: Euro-OBD)
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Servo piston assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AT-322
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 =NJAT0341

SYMPTOM:
I A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. GI
I A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM MA
Yes or No EM
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position and 8. Vehicle Can- LC
not Be Started From D1, AT-311, 314.
EC
With CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits? FE
I PNP switch
I Overdrive control switch
I A/T fluid temperature sensor CL
I Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor)
I Shift solenoid valve A or B
I Vehicle speed sensor·MTR MT
AX
SU
SAT363HC BR
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to the following items. ST
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-132
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-148 RS
SOURCE): AT-171 BT
I 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Posi-
tion Switches Circuit Checks): AT-337 HA
Euro-OBD
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-252 SC
SOURCE): AT-279 EL
I 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Posi-
tion Switches Circuit Checks): AT-337 IDX
No © GO TO 3.
AT-323

OBD
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 7.

I Shift valve B
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AT-324
6 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM

I Shift valve B EC
I Pilot valve FE
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items: CL
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band
I Torque converter MT
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-325
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up =NJAT0342

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
SAT346H
Yes or No
Yes © Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-165 (General and
except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East)/AT-239 (Euro-OBD).
No © GO TO 2.

OBD
SAT004K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.

2. Check following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter relief valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-326
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-327
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition =NJAT0343

SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
1 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?
SAT347H
Yes or No
Yes © Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-178 (General and except for Euro-OBD,
Australia and the Middle East)/AT-206 (Euro-OBD).
No © GO TO 2.

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 5.

I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
AT-328
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. GI
OK or NG
nector. EM

I Torque converter clutch control valve EC
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T. FE
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 4.
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-329
14. Lock-up Is Not Released
14. Lock-up Is Not Released =NJAT0344

SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
SAT367J
Yes or No
Yes © Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to “21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not
Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)”, AT-337.
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.
AT-330
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3)
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle

(Light Braking D4 → D3)
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0345
GI
I Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T
shifts from D4 to D3. MA
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning
overdrive control switch OFF.
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting EM
A/T from “D” to “2” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LC
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT348H
Yes or NO
Yes © Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-160 (General and except for
Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East)/AT-273 (Euro-OBD).
AX
No © GO TO 2.

SU
for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/Refer to EC-639, “DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”. — Euro- BR
OBD
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT004K
OK or NG
SC
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor. (AT-140: General and except for Euro-OBD/AT-
264: Euro-OBD) EL
IDX
AT-331
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3) (Cont’d)

1. Remove oil pan.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 6.

I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve (AT-160: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-273: Euro-
OBD)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
nector.

I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve (AT-160: General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia and the Middle East/AT-273: Euro-
OBD)
3. Disassemble A/T.
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
AT-332
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 NJAT0346

SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2. GI
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle MA
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT934FA
Yes or No CL
I VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR): AT-132 MT
Euro-OBD
I SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A: AT-252 AX
No © GO TO 2.
SU
2 CHECK SYMPTOM BR
Check again.
OK or NG ST
OK © Go to 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-314.
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. RS
nector.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-333
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When

Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF” =NJAT0347
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive
control switch to “OFF” position.
1 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
SAT344H
Yes or No
Yes © Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-334.
No © Go to 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3, AT-320.
AT-334
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector

Lever “D” → “2” Position
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0348
GI
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever
from “D” to “2” position. MA
With CONSULT-II
EM
Without CONSULT-II
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT367J MT
Yes or No
Yes © Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-337.
No © Go to 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2, AT-317.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-335
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector

Lever “2” → “1” Position =NJAT0349
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever
from “2” to “1” position.
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
SAT367J
Yes or No
No © GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
SAT778B
OK or NG
nector.
AT-336
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine

Brake
SYMPTOM:
=NJAT0350
GI
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
from 22 (12) to 11. MA
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position OK?
EM
Yes or No
Yes © Go to 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3), AT-331.
LC
No © Go to 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-308.
EC
FE
CL
MT
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position
Switches Circuit Checks) NJAT0351
SYMPTOM: AX
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diag-
nostic procedure even if the lamp circuit is good.
DESCRIPTION SU
NJAT0351S01
I PNP switch
The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range BR
SAT088JA switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector
lever position and sends a signal to the TCM.
I Overdrive control switch ST
Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and
sends a signal to the TCM.
I Throttle position switch RS
The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the BT
signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed. HA
SAT360H
SC
EL
IDX
SAT004K
AT-337
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJAT0351S02
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
3. Read out “P/N”, “R”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position.
Check that the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.
SAT701J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
I PNP switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
AT-338
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each posi-
tion. MA
Voltage:
B: Battery voltage
0: 0V
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0138
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT470J
RS
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
BT
I PNP switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-339
3 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”.
Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive “OFF”.)
SAT645J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
I Overdrive control switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
I Harness of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness) for short or open
AT-340
4 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is “ON” and “OFF”. MA
Voltage:
Switch position “ON”:
Battery voltage
Switch position “OFF”:
EM
1V or less
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SAT048K
OK or NG SU
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following items: BR
I Overdrive control switch (Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.)
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
I Harness of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness) for short or open ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-341
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT-II)

With CONSULT-II
1. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)”, AT-45. — General and except for Euro-OBD, Aus-
tralia and the Middle East/Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)”, AT-69 — Euro-OBD
MTBL0011
SAT702J
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.
harness)
AT-342
6 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT-II)

1. Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)”, AT-45. — General and except for Euro-OBD, Aus-
tralia and the Middle East/Refer to steps from 1 to 5 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)”, AT-69 — Euro-OBD MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0577
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT454JA
OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Check the following items: BT
I Throttle position switch — Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-344.
harness) HA
7 CHECK DTC
SC
Perform “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-338.
OK or NG EL
NG © I Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. IDX
I If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
AT-343
COMPONENT INSPECTION NJAT0351S03
Overdrive Control Switch NJAT0351S0301
I Check continuity between two terminals 7 and 8.
Switch position Continuity
ON No
OFF Yes
SAT005K
PNP Switch NJAT0351S0302

1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 3 and between ter-
minals 2 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
Lever position Terminal No.
P 3—7 1—2
R 3—8
N 3—9 1—2
D 3—6
2 3—5
1 3—4
SAT402JA
2. If NG, check again with manual control cable disconnected

from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control cable. Refer to AT-355.
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check con-
tinuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-355.
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SAT089JA
Throttle Position Switch NJAT0351S0303

Closed throttle position switch (idle position)
CONSULT-II)”, AT-45. — General and except for Euro-OBD,
Australia and the Middle East/Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-69. —
Euro-OBD
SAT851JA Released Yes
AT-344
Depressed No GI
I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-65, “Basic
Inspection”. — General and except for Euro-OBD, Australia MA
and the Middle East/Refer to EC-576, “Basic Inspection”. —
Euro-OBD
EM
LC
Wide open throttle position switch
EC
Released No FE
Depressed Yes
CL
SAT852JA
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-345
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
I The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other
position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
I The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock
solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder.
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location NJAT0103
SAT006K
AT-346
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — NJAT0104
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
HAT088
AT-347

SYMPTOM 1:
I Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key
in ON position and brake pedal applied.
I Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in
ON position and brake pedal released.
I Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key
is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to
“P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to
any position except “P”.
1 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-352.
2 CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — PNP Switch and Control
Cable Adjustment”, AT-355.
3 CHECK POWER SOURCE

2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch harness terminal 1 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
SAT007K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
1. Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch harness terminal 1
2. Fuse
3. Ignition switch (Refer to EL-11, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.)
AT-348
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (A/T DEVICE)

Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. GI
I Check voltage between A/T device harness terminal 2 and ground.
Voltage: MA
Brake pedal depressed:
Battery voltage
Brake pedal released:
0V
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT008K CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. MT
1. Harness for short and open between battery and stop lamp switch harness connector
1.
2. Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch harness connector 2 and A/T
device harness connector 2.
3. Fuse
AX
4. Stop lamp switch (Refer to “A/T DEVICE CHECK”, AT-351.)
SU
5 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. BR
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 3 and ground.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT009K
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. EL
IDX
AT-349
6 CHECK RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to ON.
I Check voltage between terminal 4 - 3 and 2 - 3.
SAT010K
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace A/T device.
7 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH

Refer to “A/T device Check”, AT-351.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
8 CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Refer to “A/T device Check”, AT-351.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
9 SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
OK or NG
NG © 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.
AT-350
A/T DEVICE CHECK =NJAT0105S01
1. Shift Lock Solenoid
I Check operation sound.
NJAT0105S0101
GI
When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and selector
lever is set in “P” position.
MA
Brake pedal Operation sound
Depressed Yes EM
Released No
LC
2. Park Position Switch NJAT0105S0102
I Check resistance between A/T device harness terminal 2 and EC
3.
Condition Resistance
FE
When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector
111Ω
lever button is released
When selector lever is not set in “P” position and 0Ω CL

selector lever button is released
SAT011K
MT
STOP LAMP SWITCH NJAT0105S02
Condition Continuity
When brake pedal is depressed Yes AX

When brake pedal is released No
SU
Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to
BR-11, “BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET”.
BR
SAT861JA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-351
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
Components NJAT0107
SAT996J
CAUTION:
I Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be
damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adja-
cent parts.
I After installing key interlock cable to control device, make
sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in
their positions.
Removal NJAT0108
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster
holder and remove interlock rod from cable.
SAT853J
AT-352
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Removal (Cont’d)
2. Remove lock plate from steering lock assembly and remove
key interlock cable.
GI
MA
EM
SAT854J LC
Installation NJAT0109
1. Turn ignition key to lock position. EC
2. Set A/T selector lever to P position.
3. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install
lock plate. FE
4. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with
band.
CL
SAT854J
MT
5. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
AX
SU
BR
SAT804E
6. Install casing cap to bracket.

7. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT805E
SC
EL
IDX
AT-353
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators NJAT0110

REMOVAL NJAT0110S01
1. Drain ATF from transaxle.
2. Remove oil pan and gasket.
SAT992C
3. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connector.
SAT064K
4. Remove stopper ring from A/T solenoid harness terminal body.

5. Remove A/T solenoid harness by pushing terminal body into
transmission case.
AAT265A
6. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts.

Bolt length, number and location:
Bolt symbol A B C
Bolt length “” 40.0 mm 33.0 mm 43.5 mm

(1.575 in) (1.299 in) (1.713 in)
Number of bolts 5 6 2
I Be careful not to drop manual valve and servo release

accumulator return springs.
7. Disassemble and inspect control valve assembly if necessary.
Refer to AT-369.
AAT260A
AT-354
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators (Cont’d)
8. Remove servo release and N-D accumulators by applying
compressed air if necessary.
I Hold each piston with a rag. GI
MA
EM
SAT935J LC
INSTALLATION NJAT0110S02
I Tighten fixing bolts to specification. EC
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
I Set manual shaft in Neutral position, then align manual
plate with groove in manual valve. FE
I After installing control valve assembly to transmission
case, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all
positions. CL
SAT497H
MT
Control Cable Adjustment NJAT0111
Move selector lever from the “P” position to the “1” position. You
should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents
cannot be felt or if the pointer indicating the position is improperly
aligned, the control cable needs adjustment. AX
1. Place selector lever in “P” position.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in “P” SU
position.
3. Pull control cable, by specified force, in the direction of the
arrow shown in the illustration. BR
Specified force: 6.9 N (0.7 kg, 1.5 lb)
4. Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for
1.0 mm (0.039 in). ST
5. Tighten control cable lock nut.
6. Move selector lever from “P” to “1” position again. Make sure RS
that selector lever moves smoothly.
7. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control
cable. Install any part removed. BT
HA
AAT980
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment SC NJAT0112

1. Remove control cable end from manual shaft.
2. Set manual shaft in “N” position.
EL
3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
IDX
SAT479J
AT-355
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment (Cont’d)
4. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment.
a. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
b. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight
into hole in PNP switch.
5. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts.
6. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
8. Adjust control cable. Refer to “Control Cable Adjustment”,
AT-355.
9. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-337.
SAT480J
Differential Side Oil Seal Replacement NJAT0113

1. Remove drive shaft assemblies. Refer to AX-10, “Drive Shaft”.
2. Remove oil seals.
SAT905DB
3. Install oil seals.

I Apply ATF to oil seal surface before installing.
XAT002
I Install oil seals so that dimensions “A” and “B” are within
specifications.
Unit: mm (in)
A B
5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020)
SAT027K
Revolution Sensor Replacement NJAT0114

1. Disconnect revolution sensor harness connector.
2. Remove harness bracket from A/T.
3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT303G
AT-356
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Removal NJAT0115
CAUTION:
Before separating transaxle from engine, remove the crank- GI
shaft position sensor (Euro-OBD) from transaxle. Be careful
not to damage sensor.
1. Remove battery and bracket.
MA
2. Remove air duct between throttle body and air cleaner.
3. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connector, PNP switch EM
harness connector and revolution sensor harness connector.
4. Remove crankshaft position sensor (Euro-OBD) from tran-
saxle. LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT065K
MT
5. Drain ATF from transaxle.
6. Disconnect control cable from transaxle.
7. Disconnect oil cooler hoses.
8. Remove drive shafts. Refer to AX-10, “Drive Shaft”.
9. Remove the intake manifold support bracket. Refer to EM-11,
AX
“OUTER COMPONENT PARTS”.
10. Remove starter motor from transaxle. SU
Tighten bolts to specified torque.
: 41 - 52 N·m (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
11. Remove upper bolts fixing transaxle to engine. BR
SAT304G
12. Support transaxle with a jack.
ST
RS
BT
HA
13. Remove center member. SC

I Tighten center member fixing bolts to specified torque, Refer
to EM-53, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
EL
IDX
SAT028K
AT-357
Removal (Cont’d)
14. Remove rear plate cover.
15. Remove torque converter bolts.
Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts.
16. Remove rear transaxle to engine bracket. Refer to EM-53,
“REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”.
17. Support engine with a jack.
18. Remove rear transaxle mount. Refer to EM-53, “REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION”.
19. Remove lower bolts fixing transaxle to engine.
20. Lower transaxle while supporting it with a jack.
AAT259A
Installation NJAT0116
1. Check drive plate runout.
CAUTION:
Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear
teeth.
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM-64, “FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT”.
I If this runout is out of allowance, replace drive plate with ring
gear.
SAT977H
2. When connecting torque converter to transaxle, measure dis-

tance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”:
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more
SAT573D
3. Install torque converter to drive plate.

I With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to
check that transaxle rotates freely without binding.
AAT266A
4. Tighten belts fixing transaxle.

Tightening torque Bolt length “ ”
Bolt No.
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) mm (in)
1 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 50 (1.97)
2*1 16 - 20 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 25 (0.98)
3 31 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 30 (1.18)
4*2 30 - 40 (3.1 - 4.1, 23 - 29) 16 (0.63)
5*2 16 - 20 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 20 (0.79)

SAT029K
AT-358
Installation (Cont’d)
*1: With gusset to A/T
*2: With gusset to cylinder block
GI
MA
EM
SAT058K LC
6. Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-355.
EC
7. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-337.
8. Refill transaxle with ATF and check fluid level.
9. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that tran- FE
saxle operates correctly. With parking brake applied, idle
engine. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and
“R” positions. A slight shock should be felt through the hand CL
gripping the selector each time the transaxle is shifted.
10. Perform road test. Refer to AT-91.
SAT638A
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-359
OVERHAUL
Components-1 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 and 3AX64 models
Components-1 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63

and 3AX64 models NJAT0119
AAT419A
AT-360
OVERHAUL
Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Components-1 3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0232
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT030K
AT-361
OVERHAUL

SAT102K
AT-362
OVERHAUL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT936J
AT-363
OVERHAUL

SAT061K
AT-364
OVERHAUL
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT103K
AT-365
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
Oil Channel NJAT0118
SAT032K
AT-366
OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — 3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle

Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings —
3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models GI
NJAT0117
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AAT416A
AT-367
OVERHAUL
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models
Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle

Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings —
3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0237
SAT067K
AT-368
NJAT0120
DISASSEMBLY
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
GI
MA
EM
SAT049K LC
2. Remove torque converter.
EC
FE
CL
SAT008D
MT
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as
shown at left.
a. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into
one-way clutch outer race.
b. While fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one-way AX
clutch spline using flat-bladed screwdriver.
c. Check inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque
converter assembly. SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT009D
4. Remove oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube. SC
EL
IDX
SAT586H
AT-369
DISASSEMBLY
5. Set manual shaft to “P” position.

6. Remove PNP switch.
SAT023JB
7. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.

I Do not reuse oil pan bolts.
8. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and
clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
I If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to LC-17, section “Radiator”.
SAT128E 9. Remove control valve assembly according to the following pro-
cedures.
a. Remove control valve assembly mounting bolts A, B and C.
AAT260A
AT-370
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove stopper ring from terminal body.

c. Push terminal body into transmission case and draw out sole-
noid harness. GI
MA
EM
AAT262A LC
10. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly as a pre-
caution.
EC
FE
CL
SAT017D
MT
11. Remove return spring from servo release accumulator piston.
AX
SU
BR
SAT877J
12. Remove servo release accumulator piston with compressed

air. ST
13. Remove O-rings from servo release accumulator piston.
RS
BT
HA
SAT019DA
14. Remove N-D accumulator piston and return spring with com- SC
pressed air.
15. Remove O-rings from N-D accumulator piston.
EL
IDX
SAT020D
AT-371
DISASSEMBLY
16. Check accumulator pistons and contact surface of transmis-

sion case for damage.
17. Check accumulator return springs for damage and free length.
Return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-487.
SAT023DA
18. Remove lip seals from band servo oil port.
SAT129E
19. Remove converter housing according to the following proce-

dures.
a. Remove converter housing mounting bolts A and B.
SAT027D
b. Remove converter housing.
SAT028D
c. Remove O-ring from differential oil port.
SAT131E
AT-372
DISASSEMBLY
20. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT030D LC
21. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission
case.
EC
FE
CL
NAT033
MT
22. Remove differential side bearing adjusting shim from transmis-
sion case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT132E
23. Remove differential side bearing outer race from converter

housing. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT840DB
24. Remove oil seal from converter housing using a screwdriver. SC

I Be careful not to damage case.
EL
IDX
SAT133E
AT-373
DISASSEMBLY
25. Remove side oil seal from transmission case using a screw-
driver.
SAT072D
26. Remove oil tube from converter housing.
SAT134EA
27. Remove oil pump according to the following procedures.

a. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
SAT127E
b. Remove oil pump assembly from transmission case.
SAT035D
c. Remove thrust washer and bearing race from oil pump assem-
bly.
SAT036D
AT-374
DISASSEMBLY
28. Remove brake band according to the following procedures.

a. Loosen lock nut, then back off anchor end pin.
I Do not reuse anchor end pin. GI
MA
EM
SAT037DA LC
b. Remove brake band from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
SAT038D
MT
I To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not
stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing
the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in
the figure at left.
Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. AX
SU
BR
SAT039D
c. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT040D
29. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) and reverse clutch SC
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) with reverse clutch.
EL
IDX
SAT041D
AT-375
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove input shaft assembly (high clutch) from reverse

clutch.
SAT042D
c. Remove needle bearing from high clutch drum.

d. Check input shaft assembly and needle bearing for damage or
wear.
SAT043D
30. Remove high clutch hub and needle bearing from transmission
case.
31. Check high clutch hub and needle bearing for damage or wear.
SAT044D
32. Remove front sun gear and needle bearings from transmission
case.
33. Check front sun gear and needle bearings for damage or wear.
SAT579D
34. Remove front planetary carrier assembly and low one-way

clutch according to the following procedures.
a. Remove snap ring using a screwdriver.
SAT046D
AT-376
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove front planetary carrier with low one-way clutch.
GI
MA
EM
SAT047D LC
c. Check that low one-way clutch rotates in the direction of the
arrow and locks in the opposite direction.
d. Remove low one-way clutch from front planetary carrier by
EC
rotating it in the direction of unlock.
FE
CL
SAT048D
MT
e. Remove needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
AX
SU
BR
SAT049D
f. Check front planetary carrier, low one-way clutch and needle

bearing for damage or wear. ST
g. Check clearance between pinion washer and planetary carrier
using feeler gauge.
RS
Standard clearance:
0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in)
Allowable limit: BT
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace front planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow- HA
able limit.
SAT050D
35. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly and rear sun gear SC
according to the following procedures.
a. Remove rear planetary carrier assembly from transmission
case. EL
IDX
SAT051D
AT-377
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove rear sun gear from rear planetary carrier.
SAT052D
c. Remove needle bearings from rear planetary carrier assembly.
SAT053D
d. Check rear planetary carrier, rear sun gear and needle bear-
ings for damage or wear.
e. Check clearance between pinion washer and rear planetary
carrier using feeler gauge.
Standard clearance:
0.15 - 0.70 mm (0.0059 - 0.0276 in)
Allowable limit:
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
Replace rear planetary carrier if the clearance exceeds allow-
able limit.
SAT054D
36. Remove rear internal gear from transmission case.
SAT055D
37. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.

I Check needle bearing for damage or wear.
SAT056D
AT-378
DISASSEMBLY
38. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT272E LC
39. Remove thrust washer from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
AAT215A
MT
3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 and 3AX64 models
40. Remove side cover.
I Do not reuse side cover bolts.
AX
SU
BR
SAT702D
41. Remove output shaft, output gear and reduction gear accord-
ing to the following procedures. ST
a. Set manual lever to “P” position to fix idler gear and output
gear.
RS
b. Unlock both idler gear and output gear lock nuts using a pin
punch.
BT
HA
SAT703D
c. Remove idler gear and output gear lock nuts. SC

I Do not reuse idler gear and output gear lock nuts.
EL
IDX
SAT704D
AT-379
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove idler gear and output gear using a puller.
SAT705D
e. Remove reduction pinion gear and output shaft from transmis-

sion case.
f. Remove reduction pinion bearing adjusting shim from reduc-
tion pinion gear.
g. Remove adjusting spacer from output shaft.
SAT706DB
3AX10 and 3AX18 models

42. Remove output shaft assembly according to the following pro-
cedures.
a. Remove side cover bolts.
SAT059D
b. Remove side cover by lightly tapping it with a soft hammer.

I Be careful not to drop output shaft assembly. It might
come out when removing side cover.
SAT434D
c. Remove adjusting shim.
SAT440D
AT-380
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove output shaft assembly.
GI
MA
EM
SAT439D LC
I If output shaft assembly came off with side cover, tap cover
with a soft hammer to separate.
EC
FE
CL
SAT435D
MT
e. Remove needle bearing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT453D
43. Disassemble reduction pinion gear according to the following

procedures. ST
a. Set manual shaft to position “P” to fix idler gear.
b. Unlock idler gear lock nut using a pin punch. RS
BT
HA
SAT060D
c. Remove idler gear lock nut. SC

I Do not reuse idler gear lock nut.
EL
IDX
SAT061D
AT-381
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove idler gear with puller.
SAT841DA
e. Remove reduction pinion gear.

f. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim from
reduction pinion gear.
SAT062K
44. Remove return spring from parking shaft using a screwdriver.
SAT064D
45. Draw out parking shaft and remove parking pole from trans-
mission case.
46. Check parking pole and shaft for damage or wear.
SAT065D
47. Remove parking actuator support from transmission case.

I Check parking actuator support for damage or wear.
SAT066D
AT-382
DISASSEMBLY
48. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT311G LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-383
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Manual Shaft
Manual Shaft
COMPONENTS NJAT0121
SAT481J
REMOVAL NJAT0122
1. Remove detent spring from transmission case.
SAT313G
2. Drive out manual plate retaining pin.
SAT076D
3. Drive and pull out parking rod plate retaining pin.

4. Remove parking rod plate from manual shaft.
5. Draw out parking rod from transmission case.
SAT077D
AT-384
Manual Shaft (Cont’d)
6. Pull out manual shaft retaining pin.
7. Remove manual shaft and manual plate from transmission
case. GI
MA
EM
SAT049F LC
8. Remove manual shaft oil seal.
EC
FE
CL
SAT080D
MT
INSPECTION NJAT0123
I Check component parts for wear or damage. Replace if nec-
essary.
AX
SU
BR
INSTALLATION
1. Install manual shaft oil seal.
NJAT0124 ST
I Apply ATF to outer surface of oil seal.
RS
BT
HA
SAT081D
2. Install manual shaft and manual plate. SC
EL
IDX
SAT610H
AT-385
Manual Shaft (Cont’d)
3. Align groove of manual shaft and hole of transmission case.
4. Install manual shaft retaining pin.
SAT074E
5. Install parking rod to parking rod plate.

6. Set parking rod assembly onto manual shaft.
SAT078D
7. Drive in manual plate retaining pin and parking rod plate retain-
ing pin.
SAT087D
8. Install detent spring.
SAT313G
AT-386
Oil Pump
Oil Pump
COMPONENTS NJAT0125
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT931J
MT
DISASSEMBLY NJAT0126
1. Remove seal rings.
AX
SU
BR
SAT699H
2. Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT091D
3. Remove inner and outer gear from oil pump housing. SC
EL
IDX
SAT092D
AT-387
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
SAT093D
5. Remove oil pump housing oil seal.
SAT094D
INSPECTION NJAT0127
Oil Pump Housing, Oil Pump Cover, Inner Gear and
Outer Gear NJAT0127S01
I Check for wear or damage.
Side Clearances NJAT0127S02

I Measure side clearance of inner and outer gears in at least
four places around each outside edge. Maximum measured
values should be within specified range.
Standard clearance:
0.02 - 0.04 mm (0.0008 - 0.0016 in)
I If clearance is less than standard, select inner and outer gear
as a set so that clearance is within specifications.
Inner and outer gear:
I If clearance is more than standard, replace whole oil pump
assembly except oil pump cover.
SAT095D
AT-388
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
I Measure clearance between outer gear and oil pump housing.
Standard clearance:
0.08 - 0.15 mm (0.0031 - 0.0059 in) GI
Allowable limit:
0.15 mm (0.0059 in) MA
I If not within allowable limit, replace whole oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover.
EM
SAT096D LC
Side Ring Clearance NJAT0127S03
I Install new seal rings onto oil pump cover. EC
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.1 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) FE
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) CL
I If not within allowable limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
SAT097D
MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0128
1. Install oil seal on oil pump housing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT098D
2. Install O-ring on oil pump housing.

I Apply ATF to O-ring.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT093D
3. Install inner and outer gears on oil pump housing. SC

I Take care with the direction of the inner gear.
EL
IDX
SAT092D
AT-389
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. Install oil pump cover on oil pump housing.
a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assem-
bly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly on oil
pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
b. Tighten bolts in numerical order.
SAT101D
5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring groove with
petroleum jelly.
I Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while install-
ing. It may deform the ring.
SAT699H
AT-390
Control Valve Assembly
Control Valve Assembly

COMPONENTS =NJAT0129
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT033K BR
1. Solenoid valve assembly 9. Separating plate 17. Steel ball

2. O-ring 10. Lower separating gasket 18. Control valve upper body ST
3. Clip 11. Steel ball 19. Check ball
4. Terminal body 12. Control valve inter body 20. Oil cooler relief valve spring
5. Control valve lower body 13. Pilot filter 21. O-ring
RS
6. Oil strainer 14. Upper inter separating gasket 22. T/C pressure holding spring
7. Support plate 15. Separating plate 23. Check ball
8. Lower inter separating gasket 16. Upper separating gasket
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-391
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY =NJAT0130
I Disassemble upper, inter and lower bodies.
Bolt symbol A B C D E F G
Bolt length “” 13.5 mm 58.0 mm 40.0 mm 66.0 mm 33.0 mm 78.0 mm 18.0 mm
(0.531 in) (2.283 in) (1.575 in) (2.598 in) (1.299 in) (3.071 in) (0.709 in)
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
F: Reamer bolt with nut
SAT869J
1. Remove bolts A, D and F, and remove oil strainer from control

valve assembly.
SAT083F
2. Remove solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid

valve from control valve assembly.
I Be careful not to lose the line pressure solenoid valve
spring.
SAT316GA
AT-392
3. Remove O-rings from solenoid valves and terminal body.
GI
MA
EM
SAT317G LC
4. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts B, C and F.
EC
FE
CL
SAT064F
MT
5. Remove lower body from inter body.
AX
SU
BR
SAT432D
6. Turn over lower body, and accumulator support plates.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT109D
7. Remove bolts E, separating plate and separating gaskets from SC

lower body.
8. Remove check balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C
pressure holding spring from lower body. EL
I Be careful not to lose steel balls and relief valve springs.
IDX
SAT873J
AT-393
9. Remove inter body from upper body.
10. Remove pilot filter, separating plate and gaskets from upper
body.
SAT065F
11. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in inter
body and then remove them.
I Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT870J
12. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body and then remove them.
I Be careful not to lose steel balls.
SAT871J
INSPECTION NJAT0131
Lower and Upper Bodies NJAT0131S01
I Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in
lower body.
SAT872J
I Check to see that retainer plates are properly positioned in

upper body.
SAT321G
AT-394
Oil Strainer NJAT0131S02
I Check wire netting of oil strainer for damage.
GI
MA
EM
SAT115D LC
Shift Solenoid Valves A and B, Line Pressure Solenoid
Valve, Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve and
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
EC
NJAT0131S03
I Refer to “Resistance Check” of each solenoid valve.
Except for Euro-
FE
Valves Euro-OBD
OBD
Shift solenoid valve A AT-153 AT-257 CL

Shift solenoid vavle B AT-159 AT-263
SAT322GC Line pressure solenoid valve AT-188 AT-251 MT

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-170 AT-244
Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-164 AT-278
AX
SU
BR
Oil Cooler Relief Valve Spring

I Check springs for damage or deformation.
NJAT0131S04 ST
I Measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard: RS
Unit: mm (in)
Part No. D
BT
31872 31X00 17.0 (0.669) 8.0 (0.315)
HA
SAT138D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0132
SC
1. Install upper, inter and lower body.
a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions. EL
IDX
SAT871J
AT-395
b. Install upper separating gasket, upper inter separating gasket
and upper separating plate in order shown in illustration.
I Always use new gaskets.
SAT072F
c. Install reamer bolts F from bottom of upper body. Using reamer

bolts as guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a seat.
SAT073F
d. Install pilot filter.
SAT074F
e. Place inter body as shown in the illustration. Install steel balls

in their proper positions.
SAT870J
f. Install inter body on upper body using reamer bolts F as

guides.
I Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls.
SAT076F
AT-396
g. Install check balls, oil cooler relief valve springs and T/C pres-
sure holding spring in their proper positions in lower body.
GI
MA
EM
SAT873J LC
h. Install lower separating gasket, inner separating gasket and
lower separating plate in order shown in the illustration.
EC
FE
CL
SAT077F
MT
i. Install bolts E from bottom of lower body. Using bolt E as
guides, install separating plate and gaskets as a set.
j. Install support plates on lower body.
AX
SU
BR
SAT078F
k. Install lower body on inter body using reamer bolts F as guides

and tighten reamer bolts F slightly. ST
RS
BT
HA
AAT536
2. Install O-rings to solenoid valves and terminal body. SC

I Apply ATF to O-rings.
EL
IDX
SAT317G
AT-397
3. Install and tighten bolts.
Bolt symbol A B C D E F G
Bolt length “” 13.5 mm 58.0 mm 44.0 mm 66.0 mm 33.0 mm 78.0 mm 18.0 mm
(0.531 in) (2.283 in) (1.732 in) (2.598 in) (1.299 in) (3.071 in) (0.709 in)
Number of bolts 6 3 6 11 2 2 1
F: Reamer bolt with nut
SAT869J
a. Install and tighten bolts B to specified torque.

: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
SAT081F
b. Install solenoid valve assembly and line pressure solenoid

valve to lower body.
SAT316GA
AT-398
c. Remove reamer bolts F and set oil strainer on control valve
assembly.
d. Reinstall reamer bolts F from lower body side. GI
MA
EM
SAT323G LC
e. Tighten bolts A, C, D and F to specified torque.
: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
EC
FE
CL
SAT083F
MT
f. Tighten bolts E to specified torque.
: 3.4 - 4.4 N·m (0.35 - 0.45 kg-m, 30.4 - 39.1 in-lb)
AX
SU
BR
SAT084FA
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-399
Control Valve Upper Body
Control Valve Upper Body

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS table on page AT-477.
SAT012K
1. Control valve upper body 11. Plug 24. Pilot valve

2. Overrun clutch reducing valve 12. Sleeve 25. Retainer plate
spring 13. Retainer plate 26. Plug
3. Overrun clutch reducing valve 14. 1-2 accumulator valve 27. 1-2 accumulator piston
4. Plug 15. 1-2 accumulator valve spring 28. 1-2 accumulator piston spring
5. Retainer plate 16. Plug 29. 1-2 accumulator retainer plate
6. Torque converter relief valve 17. Retainer plate 30. Retainer plate
7. Torque converter relief valve 18. Cooler check valve 31. Plug
spring 19. Cooler check valve spring 32. 1st reducing valve
8. Retainer plate 20. Plug 33. 1st reducing valve spring
9. Torque converter clutch control 21. Retainer plate 34. Retainer plate
valve
22. Retainer plate 35. 3-2 timing valve spring
10. Torque converter clutch control
valve spring 23. Pilot valve spring 36. 3-2 timing valve
AT-400
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
1. Remove valves at retainer plates.
I Do not use a magnetic “hand”. GI
MA
EM
SAT321G LC
a. Use a screwdriver to remove retainer plates.
EC
FE
CL
SAT135D
MT
b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring, plugs or sleeves.
I Remove plugs slowly to prevent internal parts from jump-
ing out.
AX
SU
BR
SAT136D
c. Place mating surface of valve body face down, and remove

internal parts. ST
I If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
RS
I Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
BT
HA
SAT137D
INSPECTION NJAT0135
SC
Valve Spring NJAT0135S01
I Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation. EL
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-477. IDX
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves NJAT0135S02
I Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.
SAT138D
AT-401
ASSEMBLY NJAT0136
I Lay control valve body down when installing valves. Do
not stand the control valve body upright.
SAT139D
1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
I Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
SAT140DA
I Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the
valves into their proper positions.
SAT141D
1-2 Accumulator Valve NJAT0136S01

I Install 1-2 accumulator valve. Align 1-2 accumulator retainer
plate from opposite side of control valve body.
I Install return spring, 1-2 accumulator piston and plug.
SAT142DA
1. Install retainer plates.

I Install retainer plate while pushing plug or return spring.
SAT143D
AT-402
Retainer Plate (for control valve upper body) NJAT0136S02
Refer to AT-400.
Unit: mm (in) GI
Name of valve and piston No. Length A Length B
Pilot valve 22 21.5 (0.846) MA

1-2 accumulator valve 17
40.5 (1.59)
1-2 accumulator piston 25 EM
1st reducing valve 30 21.5 (0.846)
SAT086F
Overrun clutch reducing valve 5 6.0 (0.236) 24.0 (0.945)
LC
Torque converter relief valve 8 21.5 (0.846)
Torque converter clutch control valve 13 28.0 (1.102)

EC
3-2 timing valve 34 21.5 (0.846)
FE
Cooler check valve 21 24.0 (0.945)
I Install proper retainer plates. CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-403
Control Valve Lower Body
Control Valve Lower Body

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS table on page AT-477.
SAT013K
1. Control valve lower body 13. Manual valve 25. Plug

2. Shift valve B spring 14. Retainer plate 26. Accumulator control valve
3. Shift valve B 15. Sleeve 27. Accumulator control valve spring
4. Plug 16. Plug 28. Retainer plate
5. Retainer plate 17. Spring seat 29. Shift valve A spring
6. Pressure modifier valve 18. Pressure regulator valve spring 30. Shift valve A
7. Pressure modifier valve spring 19. Pressure regulator valve 31. Retainer plate
8. Parallel pin 20. Retainer plate 32. Plug
9. Sleeve 21. Plug 33. Plug
10. Piston 22. Overrun clutch control valve 34. Shuttle valve spring
11. Pressure modifier piston spring 23. Overrun clutch control valve spring 35. Shuttle control valve
12. Retainer plate 24. Retainer plate
AT-404
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
Remove valves at retainer plate.
For removal procedures, refer to AT-392. GI
MA
EM
SAT872J LC
INSPECTION NJAT0139
Valve Springs NJAT0139S01 EC
I Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also
measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard: FE
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
CL
Control Valves NJAT0139S02
I Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for
SAT138D damage. MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0140
I Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to AT-402.
AX
SU
BR
SAT872J
Retainer Plate (for control valve lower body)

Refer to AT-404.
NJAT0140S01 ST
Unit: mm (in)
Name of control valve No. Length A Length B Type RS

Pressure regulator valve 14
Accumulator control valve 24 BT

Shift valve A 28 6.0 28.0
I
Overrun clutch control valve 20 (0.236) (1.102) HA
SAT089F
Pressure modifier valve 12
Shuttle control valve 31

SC
Shift valve B 5 — — II
EL
I Install proper retainer plates.
IDX
AT-405
Reverse Clutch
Reverse Clutch
SAT485JB
1. Check operation of reverse clutch.
a. Install seal ring onto drum support of oil pump cover and install
reverse clutch assembly. Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring:
I D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT155D
2. Remove snap ring.

3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, and dish
plates.
SAT156D
4. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from reverse
clutch drum while compressing return springs.
I Set Tool directly above springs.
I Do not expand snap ring excessively.
5. Remove spring retainer and return springs.
SAT157D
AT-406
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
I Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
GI
MA
EM
SAT301E LC
6. Remove piston from reverse clutch drum by turning it.
EC
FE
CL
SAT159D
MT
7. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.
AX
SU
BR
SAT138E
INSPECTION NJAT0143 ST
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return
Springs NJAT0143S01
I Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. RS
I Replace if necessary.
I When replacing spring retainer and return springs,
replace them as a set. BT
HA
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates NJAT0143S02

SC
I Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
EL
Standard value: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Wear limit: 1.8 mm (0.071 in) IDX
I If not within wear limit, replace.
SAT162D
AT-407
Reverse Clutch Dish Plates NJAT0143S03
I Check for deformation or damage.
I Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate “t”: 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
I If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
Reverse Clutch Piston NJAT0143S04

I Make sure check balls are not fixed.
I Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure that there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make
sure air leaks past ball.
SAT164D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0144
1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
I Take care with the direction of the oil seal.
I Apply ATF to both parts.
SAT160DA
2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.

I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
SAT159D
3. Install return springs and spring retainer on piston.

For return spring, refer to AT-480.
SAT168D
AT-408
4. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while com-
pressing return springs.
I Set Tool directly above return springs. GI
MA
EM
SAT157D LC
5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plates.
I Do not align the projections of any two dish plates.
EC
I Take care with the order and direction of plates.
FE
CL
SAT170D
MT
6. Install snap ring.
AX
SU
BR
SAT156D
7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If

not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. ST
Specified clearance:
Standard: 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) RS
Allowable limit: 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Retaining plate: Refer to SDS, AT-477.
BT
HA
SAT174D
8. Check operation of reverse clutch. SC

Refer to “Reverse Clutch”, AT-406.
EL
IDX
SAT173D
AT-409
High Clutch
High Clutch
SAT034K
1. Check operation of high clutch.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of input shaft.
I Stop up a hole on opposite side of input shaft.
SAT176D
2. Remove seal rings from input shaft.
SAT177D
AT-410
High Clutch (Cont’d)
4. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
GI
MA
EM
SAT178D LC
5. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from high
I Set Tool directly above springs.
EC
6. Remove spring retainer and return springs. FE
CL
SAT617H
MT
I Do not remove return spring from spring retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT302E
7. Remove piston from high clutch drum by turning it.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT189D
8. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SC
EL
IDX
SAT139E
AT-411
INSPECTION NJAT0147
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and Return
Springs NJAT0147S01
I Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
replace them as a set.
High Clutch Drive Plates NJAT0147S02

Standard value: Refer to SDS, AT-478.
Wear limit: Refer to SDS, AT-478.
SAT162D
High Clutch Piston NJAT0147S03

spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to make
SAT186D
Seal Ring Clearance NJAT0147S04

I Install new seal rings onto input shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
Standard clearance:
0.08 - 0.23 mm (0.0031 - 0.0091 in)
Allowable limit:
0.23 mm (0.0091 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace input shaft assembly.
SAT187D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0148
SAT182DA
AT-412
2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
GI
MA
EM
SAT189D LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT191D
MT
I Set Tool directly above return springs.
AX
SU
BR
SAT617H
I Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT193D
5. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. SC

Take care with the order and direction of plates.
EL
IDX
SAT195D
AT-413
not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT199D
8. Check operation of high clutch.

Refer to “High Clutch”, AT-410.
SAT196D
9. Install seal rings to input shaft.

I Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SAT197D
I Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from

spreading.
SAT198D
AT-414
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch

COMPONENTS NJAT0149
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
SAT932JA BR
DISASSEMBLY
1. Check operation of forward clutch and overrun clutch.
NJAT0150 ST
a. Install bearing retainer on forward clutch drum.
b. Apply compressed air to oil hole of forward clutch drum. RS
c. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
BT
HA
SAT201D
d. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: SC

I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. EL
IDX
SAT202D
AT-415
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch (Cont’d)
2. Remove snap ring for forward clutch.
3. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for forward clutch.
SAT203D
4. Remove snap ring for overrun clutch.

5. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish
plate for overrun clutch.
SAT204D
6. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring from forward
SAT205D
8. Remove forward clutch piston with overrun clutch piston from

forward clutch drum by turning it.
SAT216D
9. Remove overrun clutch piston from forward clutch piston by

turning it.
SAT215D
AT-416
10. Remove D-rings and oil seals from forward clutch piston and
overrun clutch piston.
GI
MA
EM
SAT140E LC
INSPECTION NJAT0151
Snap Rings and Spring Retainer NJAT0151S01 EC
FE
CL
MT
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Return Springs
NJAT0151S02
Inspection standard:
AX
I Replace if deformed or fatigued.
SU
BR
SAT138D
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Drive Plates

NJAT0151S03 ST
Thickness of drive plate: RS
Forward clutch
Wear limit: 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
BT
Overrun clutch
Standard value: 1.6 mm (0.063 in) HA
SAT162D Wear limit: 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
SC
EL
IDX
AT-417
Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch Dish Plates NJAT0151S04
I Measure thickness of dish plate.
Thickness of dish plate “t”:
Forward clutch: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
Overrun clutch: 2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
I If deformed or fatigued, replace.
SAT163D
Forward Clutch Drum NJAT0151S05

I Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole from outside of
forward clutch drum. Make sure air leaks past ball.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole from inside of forward clutch
drum. Make sure there is no air leakage.
SAT213D
Overrun Clutch Piston NJAT0151S06

spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I Apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side. Make
SAT212D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0152
1. Install D-rings and oil seals on forward clutch piston and over-
run clutch piston.
I Take care with direction of oil seal.
SAT208DA
2. Install overrun clutch piston assembly on forward clutch piston

while turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.
SAT215D
AT-418
3. Install forward clutch piston assembly on forward clutch drum
while turning it slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. GI
MA
EM
SAT216D LC
4. Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward
clutch drum.
EC
FE
CL
SAT217D
MT
5. Install return spring on piston.
6. Install spring retainer on return springs.
AX
SU
BR
SAT218D
pressing return springs. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT205D
I Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SC
EL
IDX
SAT220D
AT-419
8. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for overrun clutch.
9. Install snap ring for overrun clutch.
SAT204D
10. Measure clearance between overrun clutch retaining plate and

snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Overrun clutch retaining plate:
SAT227D
11. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate
for forward clutch.
Take care with the order and direction of plates.
12. Install snap ring for forward clutch.
SAT203D
13. Measure clearance between forward clutch retaining plate and

snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Standard: 0.45 - 0.85 mm (0.0177 - 0.0335 in)
Forward clutch retaining plate:
SAT228D
14. Check operation of forward clutch.

Refer to “Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch”, AT-415.
SAT201D
AT-420
15. Check operation of overrun clutch.
Refer to “Forward Clutch and Overrun Clutch”, AT-415.
GI
MA
EM
SAT202D LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-421
Low & Reverse Brake
Low & Reverse Brake

SAT039K
1. Check operation of low & reverse brake.
a. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case.
SAT230D
2. Stand transmission case.

4. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate from trans-
mission case.
SAT231D
AT-422
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
5. Set Tool on spring retainer and remove snap ring while com-
I Set Tool directly above return springs. GI
MA
EM
SAT242D LC
I Do not remove return springs from spring retainer.
EC
FE
CL
SAT303E
MT
7. Apply compressed air to oil hole of transmission case while
holding piston.
8. Remove piston from transmission case by turning it.
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT234D
9. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SC
EL
IDX
SAT767G
AT-423
INSPECTION NJAT0155
Low & Reverse Clutch Snap Ring, Spring Retainer and
Return Springs NJAT0155S01
replace them as a set.
Low & Reverse Brake Drive Plates NJAT0155S02

Wear limit: 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
SAT162D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0156
SAT235DA
2. Stand transmission case.

3. Install piston assembly on transmission case while turning it
slowly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
SAT239D

SAT241D
AT-424
5. Install snap ring while compressing return springs.
GI
MA
EM
SAT242D LC
6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plates and dished
plates.
I Do not align the projections on the two dished plates.
EC
I Make sure to put the plates in the correct order and direc-
tion. FE
CL
SAT254E
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT231D

not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate (front ST
side).
RS
Standard: 1.4 - 1.8 mm (0.055 - 0.071 in)
Allowable limit:
2.8 mm (0.110 in) BT
Retaining plate:
HA
SAT246D
9. Check operation of low & reverse brake. SC

Refer to “DISASSEMBLY”, AT-422.
EL
IDX
SAT230D
AT-425
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and

Overrun Clutch Hub
COMPONENTS NJAT0157
SAT875J
1. Remove snap ring from overrun clutch hub.
2. Remove overrun clutch hub from forward clutch hub.
SAT249D
3. Remove thrust washer from forward clutch hub.
SAT250D
AT-426
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
4. Remove forward clutch hub from rear internal gear.
GI
MA
EM
SAT251D LC
5. Remove end bearing from rear internal gear.
EC
FE
CL
SAT252D
MT
6. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
AX
SU
BR
SAT253D
7. Remove end bearing from forward one-way clutch.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT254D
8. Remove one-way clutch from forward clutch hub. SC
EL
IDX
SAT255D
AT-427
INSPECTION NJAT0159
Rear Internal Gear, Forward Clutch Hub and Overrun
Clutch Hub NJAT0159S01
I Check rubbing surfaces for wear or damage.
SAT256D
Snap Ring, End Bearings and Forward One-way Clutch

NJAT0159S02
I Check snap ring and end bearings for deformation and dam-
age.
I Check forward one-way clutch for wear and damage.
SAT257D
ASSEMBLY NJAT0160
1. Install forward one-way clutch on forward clutch.
I Take care with the direction of forward one-way clutch.
SAT976H
2. Install end bearing on forward one-way clutch.

I Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing.
SAT259D
3. Install thrust washer on rear internal gear.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
I Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of rear internal
gear.
SAT260D
AT-428
4. Install end bearing on rear internal gear.
I Apply petroleum jelly to end bearing.
GI
MA
EM
SAT261D LC
5. Install forward clutch hub on rear internal gear.
I Check operation of forward one-way clutch.
Hold rear internal gear and turn forward clutch hub. Check
EC
forward clutch hub for correct locking and unlocking
directions.
FE
I If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction
of forward one-way clutch.
CL
SAT713H
MT
6. Install thrust washer and overrun clutch hub.
I Align pawls of thrust washer with holes of overrun clutch
hub.
AX
SU
BR
SAT263D
7. Install overrun clutch hub on rear internal gear.

I Align projections of rear internal gear with holes of over-
ST
run clutch hub.
RS
BT
HA
SAT264D
8. Install snap ring to groove of rear internal gear. SC
EL
IDX
SAT248D
AT-429
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/Retainer — 3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/

Retainer — 3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models
COMPONENTS NJAT0239
SAT104K
1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
SAT666D
AT-430
O/Shaft, O/Gear, I/Gear, R/Pinion Gear and B/Retainer — 3AX00, 01, 19, 63 and 64 models (Cont’d)
2. Press out output shaft bearing inner race.
GI
MA
EM
SAT592G LC
3. Remove output shaft bearing outer race from bearing retainer.
EC
FE
CL
SAT168K
MT
4. Remove output gear bearing inner race.
AX
SU
BR
SAT669D
5. Remove output gear bearing outer race from bearing retainer.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT169K
6. Remove idler gear bearing inner race. SC
EL
IDX
SAT648D
AT-431
7. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case.
NAT047
8. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing from reduction pinion

gear.
NAT048
9. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from trans-

mission case.
SAT651D
INSPECTION NJAT0241
Output Shaft, Output Gear, Idler Gear and Reduction
Pinion Gear NJAT0241S01
I Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
I Check gears for wear, chips and cracks.
Bearings NJAT0241S02
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace inner and
SPD715 outer race as a set.
I Install new seal rings to output shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of out-
put shaft.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace output shaft.
SAT671D
I Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
AT-432
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bear-
ing retainer.
Standard clearance: GI
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
MA
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace bearing retainer.
EM
LC
ASSEMBLY NJAT0242
1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing on reduction pinion gear. EC
FE
CL
NAT049
MT
2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmis-
sion case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT654D
3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT655D
4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case. SC
EL
IDX
NAT051
AT-433
5. Press output gear bearing inner race on output gear.
SAT655D
6. Install output gear bearing outer race on bearing retainer.
SAT934DA
7. Press output shaft bearing inner race on output shaft.
SAT592G
8. Install output shaft bearing outer race on bearing retainer.
SAT937DA
9. Install new seal rings onto output shaft and bearing retainer.
I Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings.
SAT676D
AT-434
10. Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from
spreading.
GI
MA
EM
SAT677D LC
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear
and Bearing Retainer — 3AX10 and 3AX18 EC
models
COMPONENTS NJAT0161 FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT105K SC
EL
IDX
AT-435
Output Shaft, Idler Gear, Reduction Pinion Gear and Bearing Retainer — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models (Cont’d)
1. Remove seal rings from output shaft and bearing retainer.
SAT644D
2. Remove output shaft bearing with screwdrivers.

I Always replace bearing with a new one when removed.
I Do not damage output shaft.
SAT645D
3. Remove snap ring from bearing retainer.
SAT646D
4. Remove needle bearing from bearing retainer.
NAT046
5. Remove idler gear bearing inner race from idler gear.
SAT648D
AT-436
6. Remove idler gear bearing outer race from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
NAT047 LC
7. Press out reduction pinion gear bearing from reduction pinion
gear.
EC
FE
CL
NAT048
MT
8. Remove reduction pinion gear bearing outer race from trans-
mission case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT651D
INSPECTION NJAT0163 ST
Output Shaft, Idler Gear and Reduction Pinion Gear
NJAT0163S01
I Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending.
I Check gears for wear, chips and cracks. RS
BT
HA
Bearing NJAT0163S02
SC
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks,
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and EL
inner race as a set.
IDX
SPD715
AT-437
I Install new seal rings to output shaft.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of out-
put shaft.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within allowable limit, replace output shaft.
SAT652D
I Install new seal rings to bearing retainer.
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove of bear-
ing retainer.
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within allowable limit, replace bearing retainer.
ASSEMBLY NJAT0164
1. Press reduction pinion gear bearing on reduction pinion gear.
NAT049
2. Install reduction pinion gear bearing outer race on transmis-

sion case.
SAT654D
3. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear.
SAT655D
AT-438
4. Install idler gear bearing outer race on transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
NAT051 LC
5. Press output shaft bearing on output shaft.
EC
FE
CL
NAT052
MT
6. Press needle bearing on bearing retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT658D
7. Install snap ring to bearing retainer.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT659D
8. After packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly, carefully install SC

new seal rings on output shaft and bearing retainer.
EL
IDX
SAT660D
AT-439
I Roll paper around seal rings to prevent seal rings from
spreading.
SAT661D
Band Servo Piston Assembly

COMPONENTS NJAT0165
SAT098K
1. Remove band servo piston snap ring.
SAT288D
2. Apply compressed air to oil hole in transmission case to

remove OD servo piston retainer and band servo piston
assembly.
I Hold band servo piston assembly with a rag or nylon
waste.
SAT289D
AT-440
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
3. Apply compressed air to oil hole in OD servo piston retainer to
remove OD servo piston from retainer.
I Hold OD servo piston while applying compressed air. GI
MA
EM
SAT290DB LC
4. Remove D-ring from OD servo piston.
EC
FE
CL
SAT593GB
MT
5. Remove O-rings from OD servo piston retainer.
AX
SU
BR
SAT292DA
6. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston

retainer by pushing it forward. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT293D
7. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing SC

servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.
EL
IDX
SAT294D
AT-441
8. Remove OD servo return spring, band servo thrust washer and
band servo piston stem from band servo piston.
SAT295DA
9. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
SAT296DA
10. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
SAT594GA
INSPECTION NJAT0167
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem NJAT0167S01
I Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
SAT298DA
Return Springs NJAT0167S02

Band servo inspection standard:
SAT138D
AT-442
ASSEMBLY NJAT0168
1. Install D-rings to servo piston retainer.
I Apply ATF to O-rings. GI
I Pay attention to position of each O-ring.
MA
EM
SAT595GA LC
2. Install band servo piston stem, band servo thrust washer, OD
servo return spring and spring retainer to band servo piston.
EC
FE
CL
SAT295DA
MT
3. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing
servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.
AX
SU
BR
SAT301D
4. Install O-rings to servo piston retainer.

ST
I Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings.
RS
BT
HA
SAT296DA
5. Install band servo piston assembly to servo piston retainer by SC

pushing it inward.
EL
IDX
SAT303D
AT-443
6. Install D-ring to OD servo piston.
I Apply ATF to D-ring.
SAT596GB
7. Install O-rings to OD servo piston retainer.

I Pay attention to the positions of the O-rings.
SAT292DA
8. Install OD servo piston to OD servo piston retainer.
SAT306DA
9. Install band servo piston assembly and 2nd servo return spring
to transmission case.
I Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmis-
sion case.
SAT307DA
10. Install OD servo piston assembly to transmission case.

I Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmis-
sion case.
AAT692
AT-444
11. Install band servo piston snap ring to transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
SAT288D LC
Final Drive
COMPONENTS-1 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 AND EC
3AX64 MODELS NJAT0354
FE
CL
MT
AX
SU
BR
SAT680DA
COMPONENTS-2 3AX10 AND 3AX18 MODELS ST

NJAT0169
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT040K
AT-445
Final Drive (Cont’d)
1. Remove final gear.
SAT311D
2. Press out differential side bearings.
SAT099K
3. Remove speedometer drive gear.
SAT313D
4. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin.
SAT970H
5. Draw out pinion mate shaft from differential case.

6. Remove pinion mate gears and side gears.
SAT316D
AT-446
INSPECTION NJAT0171
Gear, Washer, Shaft and Case
I
NJAT0171S01
Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion GI
and mate gears.
I Check washers for wear. MA
EM
SAT041K LC
Bearings NJAT0171S03
I Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, EC
pitting or wear.
I When replacing taper roller bearing, replace outer and
inner race as a set. FE
CL
SPD715
MT
ASSEMBLY NJAT0172
1. Install side gear and thrust washers in differential case.
2. Install pinion mate gears and thrust washers in differential case
while rotating them.
I When inserting, be careful not to damage pinion mate gear
AX
washers.
I Apply ATF to any parts. SU
BR
SAT318D
3. Measure clearance between side gear and differential case

with washers using the following procedure. ST
a. Set Tool and dial indicator on side gear.
b. Move side gear up and down to measure dial indicator deflec- RS
tion. Always measure indicator deflection on both side gears.
Clearance between side gear and differential case with
washers: BT
0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in)
HA
NAT056
c. If not within specification adjust clearance by changing thick- SC

ness of side gear thrust washers.
Side gear thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, AT-481. EL
IDX
SMT616
AT-447
4. Install lock pin.
I Make sure that lock pin is flush with case.
SAT970H
5. Install speedometer drive gear on differential case.

I Align the projection of speedometer drive gear with the
groove of differential case.
SAT313D
6. Install final gear and tighten fixing bolts in numerical order.
SAT326D
7. Press on differential side bearings.
SMT700B
AT-448
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
Assembly (1) NJAT0173

1. Install revolution sensor onto transmission case.
Always use new sealing parts.
GI
MA
EM
SAT311G LC
2. Install differential side oil seals on transmission case and con-
verter housing, so that “A” and “B” are within specifications.
EC
FE
CL
SAT881I
MT
Unit: mm (in)
A B
5.5 - 6.5 (0.217 - 0.256) −0.5 to 0.5 (−0.020 to 0.020)

AX
SU
BR
SAT027K
3. Install parking actuator support to transmission case.

I Pay attention to direction of parking actuator support.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT328D
4. Install parking pawl on transmission case and fix it with park- SC

ing shaft.
EL
IDX
SAT329D
AT-449
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
5. Install return spring.
SAT330D
Adjustment (1) NJAT0174

DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0174S01
1. Install differential side bearing outer race without adjusting
shim on transmission case.
2. Install differential side bearing outer race on converter housing.
NAT059
3. Place final drive assembly on transmission case.

4. Install transmission case on converter housing. Tighten trans-
mission case fixing bolts A and B to the specified torque.
SAT027D
5. Attach dial indicator on differential case at transmission case

side.
6. Insert Tool into differential side gear from converter housing.
7. Move Tool up and down and measure dial indicator deflection.
Differential side bearing preload “T”:
0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in)
8. Select proper thickness of differential side bearing adjusting
shim(s) using SDS table as a guide.
Differential side bearing adjusting shim:
NAT060
AT-450
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (1) (Cont’d)
9. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
10. Remove final drive assembly from transmission case.
11. Remove differential side bearing outer race from transmission GI
case.
12. Reinstall differential side bearing outer race and shim(s)
selected from SDS table on transmission case. MA
13. Reinstall converter housing on transmission case and tighten
transmission case fixing bolts to the specified torque. EM
NAT033 LC
14. Insert Tool into differential case and measure turning torque of
final drive assembly.
I Turn final drive assembly in both directions several times
EC
to seat bearing rollers correctly.
Turning torque of final drive assembly (New bearing): FE
0.49 - 1.08 N·m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb)
I When old bearing is used again, turning torque will be
slightly less than the above. CL
I Make sure torque is close to the specified range.
NAT062
MT
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0174S02
I Be sure to remove final drive assembly before doing this pro-
cedure.
I Using caliper and straightedge, calculate a dimention “T”
(adjuster shim thickness) in the left figure by the following for- AX
mula. And adjust the inspection standard for pre-load (rotating
slide torque) as shown below.
T=A–E
SU
Inspection standard for preload:
0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb) BR
SAT876J
1. Remove transmission case and final drive assembly from con-

verter housing. ST
2. Select proper thickness of reduction pinion gear bearing
adjusting shim using the following procedures.
RS
a. Place reduction pinion gear on transmission case as shown.
BT
HA
SAT332DA
b. Place idler gear bearing on transmission case. SC

c. Measure dimensions “B”, “C” and “D” and calculate dimension
“A”.
A = D − (B + C) EL
“A”: Distance between the surface of idler gear bear-
ing inner race and the adjusting shim mating surface
of reduction pinion gear. IDX
SAT333DA
AT-451
ASSEMBLY
I Measure dimension “B” between the end of reduction pinion
gear and the surface of transmission case.
I Measure dimension “B” in at least two places.
SAT334DA
I Measure dimension “C” between the surface of idler gear bear-

ing inner race and the surface of transmission case.
I Measure dimension “C” in at least two places.
SAT335D
I Measure dimension “D” between the end of reduction pinion

gear and the adjusting shim mating surface of reduction pin-
ion gear.
I Measure dimension “D” in at least two places.
I Calculate dimension “A”.
A = D − (B + C)
SAT336DA
d. Measure dimension “E” between the end of idler gear and the
idler gear bearing inner race mating surface of idler gear.
I Measure dimension “E” in at least two places.
SAT337D
e. Calculate “T” and select proper thickness of reduction pinion

gear bearing adjusting shim using SDS table as a guide.
T = A − E – 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)*
Reduction pinion gear bearing adjusting shim:
*: Bearing preload
AT-452
ASSEMBLY
3. Install reduction pinion gear and reduction pinion gear bearing
adjusting shim selected in step 2-e on transmission case.
4. Press idler gear bearing inner race on idler gear. GI
5. Press idler gear on reduction pinion gear.
I Press idler gear so that idler gear can be locked by park-
ing pawl. MA
EM
SAT338DA LC
6. Tighten idler gear lock nut to the specified torque.
I Lock idler gear with parking pawl when tightening lock
nut.
EC
FE
CL
SAT339D
MT
7. Measure turning torque of reduction pinion gear.
I When measuring turning torque, turn reduction pinion
gear in both directions several times to seat bearing roll-
ers correctly.
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear: AX
0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb)
SU
BR
SAT340DC
OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING PRELOAD — 3AX00, 3AX01,

3AX19, 3AX63 AND 3AX64 MODELS ST
NJAT0174S04
1. Select proper thickness of output shaft bearing adjusting
spacer using the following procedures. RS
a. Remove paper rolled around output shaft.
b. Place bearing retainer on output shaft.
BT
HA
SAT682D
c. Place output gear bearing inner race on bearing retainer. SC

d. Measure dimensions “G” and “H” and calculate dimension “F”.
“F”: Distance between the surface of output gear bearing
inner race and adjusting shim mating surface of output EL
shaft.
F=H–G
IDX
SAT683D
AT-453
ASSEMBLY
I Measure dimension “G” between end of output shaft and sur-
face of output gear bearing inner race.
I Measure dimension “G” in at least two places.
SAT684D
I Measure dimension “H” between end of output shaft and

adjusting spacer mating surface of output shaft.
I Measure dimension “H” in at least two places.
I Calculate dimension “F”.
F=H–G
SAT685D
e. Measure dimension “I” between end of output gear (adjusting

spacer mating surface) and bearing inner race fitting surface.
I Measure dimension “I” in at least two places.
SAT686D
f. Calculate dimension “T2”.

“T2”: Distance between adjusting spacer mating surface
of output gear and output shaft
T2 = F – I
g. Select proper thickness of output shaft bearing adjusting
spacer using SDS table as a guide.
Output shaft bearing adjusting spacer:
2. Install bearing retainer on transmission case.
SAT687D
AT-454
ASSEMBLY
3. Place output shaft on bearing retainer.
4. Place output shaft bearing adjusting spacer selected in step
1-g on output shaft. GI
5. Press output gear bearing inner race on output gear.
6. Press output gear on output shaft.
MA
EM
SAT688D LC
7. Tighten output gear lock nut to specified torque.
EC
FE
CL
SAT689D
MT
8. Remove idler gear to measure output shaft bearing preload.
AX
SU
BR
SAT690D
9. Measure output shaft bearing preload.

I When measuring bearing preload, turn output shaft in
ST
both directions several times to seat bearing rollers cor-
rectly.
RS
Output shaft bearing preload:
0.25 - 0.88 N·m (2.5 - 9.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 7.8 in-lb)
I If not within specified range, readjust bearing preload. BT
HA
SAT691D
10. Install idler gear and tighten lock nut to specified torque. SC
11. After properly adjusting bearing preload, clinch idler gear and
output gear lock nuts as shown.
EL
IDX
SAT692D
AT-455
ASSEMBLY
12. Install new gasket and side cover on transmission case.
I Always replace side cover bolts when removed.
I Refer to “Overhaul”, AT-364.
SAT224E
OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY — 3AX10 AND 3AX18

MODELS NJAT0174S03
I Measure clearance between side cover and the end of the
output shaft bearing.
I Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that clearance is
within specifications.
SAT341D
1. Install bearing retainer for output shaft.
SAT347D
2. Install output shaft thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.
SAT438D
3. Install output shaft on transmission case.
SAT439D
AT-456
ASSEMBLY
4. Measure dimensions “1” and “2” at side cover and then cal-
culate dimension “A”.
I Measure dimension “1” and “2” in at least two places GI
“A”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface
and adjusting shim mating surface
A = 1 − 2 MA
2: Height of gauge
EM
SAT874DA LC
5. Measure dimensions “2” and “3” and then calculate dimen-
sion “B”.
Measure “2” and “3” in at least two places. EC
“B”: Distance between the end of output shaft bearing
outer race and the side cover fitting surface of transmis-
sion case FE
B = 2 − 3
2: Height of gauge CL
SAT875DA
MT
6. Select proper thickness of adjusting shim so that output shaft
end play (clearance between side cover and output shaft bear-
ing) is within specifications.
Output shaft end play (A − B):
0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in) AX
Output shaft end play adjusting shim:
Refer to SDS, AT-486. SU
7. Install adjusting shim on output shaft bearing.
BR
SAT440D
8. Apply locking sealant to transmission case as shown in illus-

tration. ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT441D
9. Install side cover on transmission case. SC

I Apply locking sealant to the mating surface of transmis-
sion case.
EL
IDX
SAT442D
AT-457
ASSEMBLY
10. Tighten side cover fixing bolts to specified torque.
I Do not mix bolts A and B.
I Always replace bolts A as they are self-sealing bolts.
I Refer to “Overhaul”, AT-365.
SAT124E

1. Remove paper rolled around bearing retainer.
2. Install thrust washer on bearing retainer.
SAT354D
3. Install forward clutch assembly.

I Align teeth of low & reverse brake drive plates before
installing.
I Make sure that bearing retainer seal rings are not spread.
SAT355D
4. Install thrust needle bearing on bearing retainer.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust bearing.
I Pay attention to direction of thrust needle bearing.
SAT356D
5. Install thrust needle bearing on rear internal gear.

I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing.
SAT357D
AT-458
ASSEMBLY
6. Hold forward clutch hub and turn overrun clutch hub.
Check overrun clutch hub for directions of lock and unlock.
I If not as shown in illustration, check installed direction of for- GI
ward one-way clutch.
MA
EM
SAT358D LC
7. Install rear internal gear assembly.
I Align teeth of forward clutch and overrun clutch drive
plate.
EC
FE
CL
SAT359D
MT
8. Install needle bearing on rear planetary carrier.
I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
I Pay attention to direction of needle bearing.
AX
SU
BR
SAT360D
9. Install rear sun gear on rear planetary carrier.

I Pay attention to direction of rear sun gear.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT052D
10. Install rear planetary carrier on transmission case. SC
EL
IDX
SAT362D
AT-459
ASSEMBLY
11. Install thrust needle bearing on front planetary carrier.
I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust needle bearing.
SAT363D
12. Install low one-way clutch to front planetary carrier by turning

it in the direction of the arrow as shown.
13. While holding front planetary carrier, turn low one-way clutch.
Check low one-way clutch for correct directions of lock and
unlock.
SAT048D
14. Install front planetary carrier assembly on transmission case.
SAT047D
15. Install snap ring with screwdriver.

I Forward clutch and bearings must be correctly installed
for snap ring to fit groove of transmission case.
SAT046D
16. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.

SAT367D
AT-460
ASSEMBLY
17. Install front sun gear on front planetary carrier.
GI
MA
EM
SAT368D LC
18. Install needle bearing on front sun gear.
EC
FE
CL
SAT369D
MT
19. Install high clutch hub on front sun gear.
AX
SU
BR
SAT370D
20. Install needle bearing on high clutch hub.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT371D
21. Remove paper rolled around input shaft. SC

22. Install input shaft assembly.
I Align teeth of high clutch drive plates before installing.
EL
IDX
SAT372D
AT-461
ASSEMBLY
23. Install reverse clutch assembly.
I Align teeth of reverse clutch drive plates before installing.
SAT373D
Adjustment (2) NJAT0176

When any parts listed below are replaced, adjust total end play and
reverse clutch end play.
Reverse clutch
Part name Total end play
end play
Transmission case I I
Overrun clutch hub I I
Rear internal gear I I
Rear planetary carrier I I
Rear sun gear I I
Front planetary carrier I I
Front sun gear I I
High clutch hub I I
High clutch drum I I
Oil pump cover I I
Reverse clutch drum — I
TOTAL END PLAY NJAT0176S01

I Measure clearance between reverse clutch drum and needle
bearing for oil pump cover.
I Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is
SAT374D
1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension

“J”.
SAT375D
AT-462
ASSEMBLY
a. Measure dimension “K”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT376D LC
b. Measure dimension “L”.
c. Calculate dimension “J”.
“J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of trans-
EC
mission case and needle bearing mating surface of high
clutch drum
FE
J=K−L
CL
SAT377D
MT
2. Measure dimension “M”.
a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
AX
SU
BR
SAT378D
b. Measure dimension “M”.

“M”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface ST
and needle bearing on oil pump cover
“M1”: Indication of gauge
RS
BT
HA
SAT379D
c. Measure thickness of straightedge “t”. SC

M = M1 − t
EL
IDX
SAT443D
AT-463
ASSEMBLY
3. Adjust total end play “T3”.
T3 = J − M
Total end play “T3”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
I Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play
is within specifications.
Bearing races: Refer to SDS, AT-487.
REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY NJAT0176S02

I Measure clearance between oil pump cover and thrust washer
for reverse clutch drum.
I Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that end play is
SAT380D
1. Measure dimensions “O” and “P” and then calculate dimension

“N”.
SAT381D
a. Place thrust washer on reverse clutch drum.

b. Measure dimension “O”.
SAT382D
c. Measure dimension “P”.

d. Calculate dimension “N”.
“N”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of trans-
mission case and thrust washer on reverse clutch drum
N=O−P
SAT383D
AT-464
ASSEMBLY
2. Measure dimensions “R” and “S” and then calculate dimension
“Q”.
GI
MA
EM
SAT384D LC
a. Measure dimension “R”.
EC
FE
CL
SAT385D
MT
b. Measure dimension “S”.
c. Calculate dimension “Q”.
“Q”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface
and thrust washer mating surface
Q=R−S AX
SU
BR
SAT386D
3. Adjust reverse clutch end play “T4”.

T4 = N − Q
ST
Reverse clutch end play:
0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in) RS
I Select proper thickness of thrust washer so that reverse clutch
end play is within specifications.
Thrust washer: Refer to SDS, AT-487. BT
HA

SC
1. Remove reverse clutch assembly and install needle bearing on
high clutch assembly.
EL
2. Install reverse clutch assembly.
IDX
SAT387D
AT-465
ASSEMBLY
3. Install anchor end pin and lock nut on transmission case.
4. Place brake band on outside of reverse clutch drum. Tighten
anchor end pin just enough so that brake band is evenly fitted
on reverse clutch drum.
SAT038D
5. Place bearing race selected in total end play adjustment step

on oil pump cover.
I Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
SAT389D
6. Place thrust washer selected in reverse clutch end play step

on reverse clutch drum.
SAT390D
7. Install oil pump assembly on transmission case.
SAT391D
8. Tighten oil pump fixing bolts to specified torque.
SAT392D
AT-466
ASSEMBLY
9. Install O-ring to input shaft.
I Apply ATF to O-ring.
GI
MA
EM
SAT034D LC
10. Adjust brake band.
a. Tighten anchor end pin to specified torque.
EC
Anchor end pin:
: 3.9 - 5.9 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
FE
CL
SAT394D
MT
b. Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns.
AX
SU
BR
SAT395D
c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.

ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT396D
11. Apply compressed air to oil holes of transmission case and SC

check operation of brake band.
EL
IDX
SAT397D
AT-467
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (4)

1. Install final drive assembly on transmission case.
SAT030D
2. Install oil tube on converter housing.
SAT033DA
3. Install O-ring on differential oil port of transmission case.

4. Install converter housing on transmission case.
I Apply locking sealant to mating surface of converter
housing.
Bolt Length mm (in)
A 32.8 (1.291)
B 40 (1.57)
SAT405D
5. Install accumulator piston.

a. Check contact surface of accumulator piston for damage.
SAT406DA
AT-468
ASSEMBLY
b. Install O-rings on accumulator piston.
Accumulator piston O-rings: GI
MA
EM
SAT407DA LC
c. Install accumulator pistons and return springs on transmission
case.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
EC
Return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-487. FE
CL
SAT878J
MT
6. Install lip seals for band servo oil holes on transmission case.
I Apply petroleum jelly to lip seals.
AX
SU
BR
SAT021D
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT022D
7. Install control valve assembly. SC

a. Insert manual valve into control valve assembly.
I Apply ATF to manual valve.
EL
IDX
SAT017D
AT-469
ASSEMBLY
b. Pass solenoid harness through transmission case and install
terminal body on transmission case by pushing it.
c. Install stopper ring to terminal body.
AAT261A
d. Tighten bolts A, B and C.

: 7 - 9 N·m (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61 - 78 in-lb)
Bolt length, number and location
Bolt symbol A B C
Bolt length “” 40.0 mm 33.0 mm 43.5 mm

(1.575 in) (1.299 in) (1.713 in)
Number of bolts 5 6 2
AAT260A
8. Install oil pan.

a. Attach magnet to oil pan.
SAT418D
b. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.

c. Install oil pan on transmission case.
I Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
I Tighten the four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent
dislocation of gasket.
d. Tighten drain plug to specified torque.
SAT128E
AT-470
ASSEMBLY
9. Install PNP switch.
a. Set manual shaft in “P” position.
b. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft. GI
c. Move selector lever to “N” position.
MA
EM
SAT023JB LC
d. Use a 4 mm (0.157 in) pin for this adjustment.
1) Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole.
EC
2) Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight
into hole in PNP switch.
e. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. FE
f. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch.
CL
SAT426DB
MT
10. Install oil charging pipe and oil cooler tube to transmission
case.
AX
SU
BR
SAT586H
11. Install torque converter.

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
ST
I Approximately 1 liter (7/8 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a
new torque converter. RS
I When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
of fluid as was drained.
BT
HA
SAT428DA
b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque con- SC

verter with notches of oil pump.
EL
IDX
SAT429D
AT-471
ASSEMBLY
c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in
proper position.
Distance “A”:
15.9 mm (0.626 in) or more
SAT430D
AT-472
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
General Specifications NJAT0179
General and except for Euro-OBD GI

Applied model QG15DE QG16DE QG18DE QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE
With catalyzer Without catalyzer MA

RE4F03B
Automatic transaxle assembly
3AX01 3AX19 3AX10 3AX00 3AX19 3AX10 EM
1st 2.861
2nd 1.562 LC
Transaxle gear 3rd 1.000
ratio
4th 0.697 EC
Reverse 2.310
Final drive 3.827 4.072 4.072 4.072 4.072 4.072 FE

Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan ATF or equivalent*1
Fluid capacity (Imp qt) 7.0 (6-1/8) CL
Middle East Australia Euro-OBD

MT
Applied model RE4F03B
QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE QG16DE QG18DE QG18DE
Automatic transaxle assembly 3AX63 3AX64 3AX10 3AX19 3AX10 3AX18
1st 2.861
AX
2nd 1.562
Transaxle gear 3rd 1.000 SU

ratio
4th 0.697
Reverse 2.310 BR
Final drive 4.072 4.072 4.072 4.072 4.072 4.072
Recommended fluid Genuine Nissan ATF or equivalent*1 ST

Fluid capacity (Imp qt) 7.0 (6-1/8)
*1: Refer to MA-21, “Fluids and Lubricants”. RS

Shift Schedule NJAT0180
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS NJAT0180S01
BT
1. For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG15DE + 3AX01 model (With catalyzer)
Throttle position
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
HA
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
Full throttle
54 - 62
(34 - 39)
102 - 110
(63 - 68)
162 - 170
(101 - 106)
158 - 166
(98 - 103)
92 - 100
(57 - 62)
41 - 49
(25 - 30)
54 - 62
(34 - 39)
SC
26 - 34 51 - 59 122 - 130 70 - 78 40 - 48 5 - 13 54 - 62
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (32 - 37) (76 - 81) (43 - 48) (25 - 30) (3 - 8) (34 - 39) EL
IDX
AT-473
Shift Schedule (Cont’d)
For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG16DE + 3AX19 model (With catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG18DE + 3AX10 model (With catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35)
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
2. For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG13DE + 3AX00 model (Without catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
50 - 58 95 - 103 152 - 160 148 - 156 85 - 93 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (59 - 64) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
25 - 33 50 - 58 103 - 111 54 - 62 32 - 40 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (64 - 69) (34 - 39) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG16DE + 3AX19 model (Without catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
For General and except for Euro-OBD: QG18DE + 3AX10 model (Without catalyzer)
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35)
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
3. For the Middle East: QG13DE + 3AX63 model

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
50 - 58 95 - 103 152 - 160 148 - 156 85 - 93 41 - 49 50 - 58

Full throttle
(31 - 36) (59 - 64) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
AT-474

Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1 GI
25 - 33 50 - 58 103 - 111 54 - 62 32 - 40 5 - 13 50 - 58
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (64 - 69) (34 - 39) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
MA
For the Middle East: QG16DE + 3AX64 model
EM
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58

LC
Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
Half throttle
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58 EC
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
FE
For the Middle East: QG18DE + 3AX10 model
Throttle position CL
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35) MT
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35)
4. For Australia: QG16DE + 3AX19 model

AX
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
SU
50 - 58 96 - 104 152 - 160 148 - 156 86 - 94 41 - 49 50 - 58
Full throttle
(31 - 36) (60 - 65) (94 - 99) (92 - 97) (53 - 58) (25 - 30) (31 - 36)
28 - 36 55 - 63 119 - 127 76 - 84 36 - 44 5 - 13 50 - 58 BR
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (34 - 39) (74 - 79) (47 - 52) (22 - 27) (3 - 8) (31 - 36)
ST
For Australia: QG18DE + 3AX10 model
Throttle position RS
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
49 - 57 93 - 101 148 - 156 144 - 152 83 - 91 41 - 49 49 - 57

Full throttle
(30 - 35) (58 - 63) (92 - 97) (89 - 94) (52 - 57) (25 - 30) (30 - 35) BT
26 - 34 50 - 58 112 - 120 63 - 71 32 - 40 5 - 13 49 - 57
Half throttle
(16 - 21) (31 - 36) (70 - 75) (39 - 44) (20 - 25) (3 - 8) (30 - 35) HA
5. For Euro-OBD: QG18DE + 3AX18 model

SC
Throttle position
D 1 , D2 D2 , D 3 D3 , D 4 D4 , D 3 D3 , D 2 D2 , D 1 12 , 1 1
EL
51 - 59 97 - 105 154 - 162 150 - 158 87 - 95 41 - 49 51 - 59
Full throttle
(32 - 37) (60 - 65) (96 - 101) (93 - 98) (54 - 59) (25 - 30) (32 - 37)
28 - 36 52 - 60 117 - 125 66 - 74 33 - 41 5 - 13 51 - 59
IDX
Half throttle
(17 - 22) (32 - 37) (73 - 78) (41 - 46) (21 - 25) (3 - 8) (32 - 37)
AT-475
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING LOCK-UP =NJAT0180S02
(Throttle opening: 2.0/8, Shift pattern: Comfort)
Engine model Destination OD switch
Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF
General and except for ON (D4) 76 - 86 (48 - 53) 54 - 62 (34 - 39)

QG13DE Euro-OBD
Middle East OFF (D3) Not applied Not applied

QG15DE
Euro-OBD
OFF (D3) Not applied Not applied

Euro-OBD
QG16DE
Australia
Middle East OFF (D3) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57)
General (Except Taiwan) ON (D4) 88 - 96 (55 - 60) 59 - 67 (37 - 42)

and except for Euro-OBD
Australia
Middle East OFF (D3) 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57)
QG18DE
Euro-OBD ON (D4) 92 - 100 (57 - 62) 67 - 75 (42 - 47)
Taiwan
South Africa OFF (D3) 96 - 104 (60 - 65) 93 - 101 (58 - 63)
Stall Revolution NJAT0181
Engine model Stall revolution rpm
QG13DE 2,000 - 2,300
QG15DE 2,000 - 2,300
QG16DE 2,200 - 2,700
QG18DE 2,050 - 2,500
Line Pressure NJAT0182
2
Line pressure kPa (bar, kg/cm , psi)
Engine model Engine speed
R position D position 2 position 1 position
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG13DE 1,125 (11.25, 11.5, 1,125 (11.25, 11.5, 1,125 (11.25, 11.5,
Stall 1,750 (17.5, 17.9, 254)
163) 163) 163)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG15DE 1,639 (16.39, 16.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7, 1,053 (10.53, 10.7,
Stall
238) 153) 153) 153)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG16DE 1,683 (16.83, 17.2, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04, 1,082 (10.82, 11.04,
Stall
244) 157) 157) 157)
Idle 778 (7.78, 7.9, 113) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73) 500 (5.0, 5.1, 73)
QG18DE
1,705 (17.05, 17.4, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2, 1,096 (10.96, 11.2,
Stall
247) 159) 159) 159)
AT-476
Control Valves
Control Valves NJAT0183

CONTROL VALVE AND PLUG RETURN SPRINGS NJAT0183S01
Unit: mm (in)
GI
No. Parts Part No.* Free length Outer diameter
35 3-2 timing valve spring 31736-01X00 23.0 (0.906) 6.65 (0.2618)

MA
19 Cooler check valve spring 31742-3AX05 28.04 (1.1039) 7.15 (0.2815)
23 Pilot valve spring 31742-3AX03 38.98 (1.5346) 8.9 (0.350)

EM
15 1-2 accumulator valve spring 31742-3AX00 20.5 (0.807) 6.95 (0.2736)
Upper QG13DE
LC
body 31742-3AX08 55.26 (2.1756) 19.6 (0.772)
model
Refer to
“Control
28 1-2 accumulator piston spring
QG15DE, EC
Valve QG16DE
Upper & 31742-3AX09 55.66 (2.1913) 19.5 (0.7677)
Body”, QG18DE
AT-400. models FE
33 1st reducing valve spring 31742-80X05 27.0 (1.063) 7.0 (0.276)
2 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-80X06 37.5 (1.476) 7.0 (0.276) CL
7 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-3AX04 33.3 (1.3110) 9.0 (0.354)
10 Torque converter clutch control valve spring 31742-3AX02 53.01 (2.0870) 6.5 (0.256) MT
34 Shuttle valve spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.0079) 5.65 (0.2224)
18 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-80X13 45.0 (1.772) 15.0 (0.591)
23 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Lower
body 27 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-80X02 22.0 (0.866) 6.5 (0.256) AX
Refer to
“Control 29 Shift valve A spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276)
Valve
2 Shift valve B spring 31762-80X00 21.7 (0.854) 7.0 (0.276) SU
Lower
Body”, 11 Pressure modifier piston spring 31742-41X15 30.5 (1.201) 9.8 (0.386)
AT-404.
7 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-80X16 32.0 (1.260) 6.9 (0.272) BR
— Oil cooler relief valve spring 31872-31X00 17.02 (0.6701) 8.0 (0.315)
— T/C pressure spring 31742-3AX07 9.0 (0.354) 7.3 (0.287)

ST
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
RS
Clutch and Brakes NJAT0184
REVERSE CLUTCH NJAT0184S01
BT
Number of drive plates 2
Number of driven plates 2

HA
Standard 2.0 (0.079)
Drive plate thickness mm (in)
Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071)
SC
Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)
Clearance mm (in)
EL
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
4.4 (0.173) 31537-31X00

Thickness of retaining plates 4.6 (0.181) 31537-31X01 IDX
4.8 (0.189) 31537-31X02
5.0 (0.197) 31537-31X03
5.2 (0.205) 31537-31X04
AT-477
Clutch and Brakes (Cont’d)
HIGH CLUTCH NJAT0184S02
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63 models

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
4.4 (0.173) 31537-32X03

4.6 (0.181) 31537-32X04
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05
Thickness of retaining plates
5.0 (0.197) 31537-32X06
5.2 (0.205) 31537-32X07
5.4 (0.213) 31537-32X08
5.6 (0.220) 31537-32X09
5.8 (0.228) 31537-32X10
2. QG15DE + 3AX01 model/QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64 models

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05

5.0 (0.197) 31537-32X06
Thickness of retaining plate 5.2 (0.205) 31537-32X07
5.4 (0.213) 31537-32X08
5.6 (0.220) 31537-32X09
5.8 (0.228) 31537-32X10
6.0 (0.236) 31537-32X11

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
3.6 (0.142) 31537-32X12

3.8 (0.150) 31537-32X00
4.2 (0.165) 31537-32X02
4.4 (0.173) 31537-32X03
4.6 (0.181) 31537-32X04
4.8 (0.189) 31537-32X05
AT-478
FORWARD CLUTCH NJAT0184S03

GI

MA
Clearance mm (in)
Standard 0.45 - 0.85 (0.0177 - 0.0335) EM
Thickness mm (in) Part number* LC

3.6 (0.142) 31537-31X60
3.8 (0.150) 31537-31X61
Thickness of retaining plate
4.0 (0.157) 31537-31X62 EC
4.2 (0.165) 31537-31X63
4.4 (0.173) 31537-31X64
4.6 (0.181) 31537-31X65
FE
OVERRUN CLUTCH NJAT0184S04 CL

Number of driven plates 4 MT

Standard 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)

Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 2.0 (0.079) AX
3.6 (0.142) 31567-31X79 SU

4.0 (0.157) 31567-31X81
4.2 (0.165) 31567-31X82
4.4 (0.173) 31567-31X83 BR
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE ST

NJAT0184S05
Number of drive plates 4 RS
Number of driven plates 3+1
Standard 2.0 (0.079) BT

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071) HA

Clearance mm (in)

SC
3.6 (0.142) 31667-31X16

3.8
4.0
(0.150)
(0.157)
31667-31X17
31667-31X18
EL
4.2 (0.165) 31667-31X19
4.4 (0.173) 31667-31X20
4.6 (0.181) 31667-31X21 IDX
AT-479
2. QG15DE + 3AX01 model/QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64 models/QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models
Number of driven plates 4+1

Standard 1.4 - 1.8 (0.055 - 0.071)

Clearance mm (in)
3.6 (0.142) 31667-31X16

3.8 (0.150) 31667-31X17
4.0 (0.157) 31667-31X18
4.2 (0.165) 31667-31X19
4.4 (0.173) 31667-31X20
4.6 (0.181) 31667-31X21
BRAKE BAND NJAT0184S06
Anchor end pin tightening torque 3.5 - 5.8 N·m (0.35 - 0.6 kg-m, 31 - 52 in-lb)
Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin 2.5±0.125
Lock nut tightening torque 31 - 36 N·m (3.2 - 3.7 kg-m, 23 - 27 ft-lb)
Clutch and Brake Return Springs NJAT0185

Unit: mm (in)
Parts Free length Outer diameter Part number*
Outer (16 pcs) 26.6 (1.047) 10.6 (0.417) 31505-31X02

Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
Inner (16 pcs) 26.3 (1.035) 7.7 (0.303) 31505-31X03
Reverse clutch (16 pcs) 18.6 (0.732) 8.0 (0.315) 31505-31X00
High clutch (12 pcs) 19.7 (0.776) 11.1 (0.437) 31505-31X01
Low reverse brake (20 pcs) 25.1 (0.988) 7.6 (0.299) 31505-31X04
Oil Pump NJAT0186
Oil pump side clearance mm (in) 0.02 - 0.04 (0.0008 - 0.0016)
Inner gear
9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 31346-31X00

9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 31346-31X01
9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31346-31X02
Thickness of inner gears and outer gears
Outer gear
9.99 - 10.00 (0.3933 - 0.3937) 31347-31X00

9.98 - 9.99 (0.3929 - 0.3933) 31347-31X01
9.97 - 9.98 (0.3925 - 0.3929) 31347-31X02
Clearance between oil pump hous- Standard 0.08 - 0.15 (0.0031 - 0.0059)
ing and outer gear mm (in) Allowable limit 0.15 (0.0059)
Oil pump cover seal ring clearance Standard 0.1 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
mm (in) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098)
AT-480
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
Input Shaft NJAT0187
Unit: mm (in) GI
Standard 0.08 - 0.23 (0.0031 - 0.0091)
Input shaft seal ring clearance
Allowable limit 0.23 (0.0091) MA
Planetary Carrier NJAT0188

Unit: mm (in)
EM
Clearance between planetary carrier and pin- Standard 0.15 - 0.70 (0.0059 - 0.0276)
ion washer Allowable limit 0.80 (0.0315)
LC
Final Drive NJAT0189

EC
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE NJAT0189S01
Clearance between side gear and differential case with washer 0.1 - 0.2 mm (0.004 - 0.008 in) FE
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR THRUST WASHERS NJAT0189S02
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63 models/QG15DE + 3AX01 model CL
NJAT0189S0201
0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 38424-31X00

MT
0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 38424-31X01
0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 38424-31X02
0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 38424-31X03
0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-31X04
AX
2. QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64 models/QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models NJAT0189S0202
Thickness mm (in) Part number* SU

0.75 - 0.80 (0.0295 - 0.0315) 38424-D2111
0.80 - 0.85 (0.0315 - 0.0335) 38424-D2112
0.85 - 0.90 (0.0335 - 0.0354) 38424-D2113 BR
0.90 - 0.95 (0.0354 - 0.0374) 38424-D2114
0.95 - 1.00 (0.0374 - 0.0394) 38424-D2115
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. ST
BEARING PRELOAD NJAT0189S03
RS
Differential side bearing preload “T” 0.04 - 0.09 mm (0.0016 - 0.0035 in)
TURNING TORQUE NJAT0189S04 BT

Turning torque of final drive assembly 0.49 - 1.08 N·m (5.0 - 11.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 9.5 in-lb)
HA
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0189S05
1. QG13DE + 3AX00, 3AX63 models/QG15DE + 3AX01 model/QG16DE + 3AX19, 3AX64
models NJAT0189S0501
SC
0.40 (0.0157) 38454-M8001 EL

0.44 (0.0173) 38454-M8003
0.48 (0.0189) 38454-M8005
0.52 (0.0205) 38454-M8007 IDX
0.56 (0.0220) 38454-M8009
0.60 (0.0236) 38454-M8011
0.64 (0.0252) 38454-M8013
0.68 (0.0268) 38454-M8015
AT-481
2. QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models NJAT0189S0502
0.40 (0.0157) 31499-21X07

0.44 (0.0173) 31499-21X05
0.48 (0.0189) 31499-21X09
0.52 (0.0205) 31499-21X10
0.56 (0.0220) 31499-21X11
0.60 (0.0236) 31499-21X12
0.64 (0.0252) 31499-21X13
0.68 (0.0268) 31499-21X14
0.72 (0.0283) 31499-21X15
0.76 (0.0299) 31499-21X16
0.80 (0.0315) 31499-21X17
0.84 (0.0331) 31499-21X18
0.88 (0.0346) 31499-21X19
0.92 (0.0362) 31499-21X20
1.44 (0.0567) 31499-21X12
TABLE FOR SELECTING DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0189S06

Unit: mm (in)
Dial indicator deflection Suitable shim(s)
0.31 - 0.35 (0.0122 - 0.0138) 0.40 (0.0157)

0.35 - 0.39 (0.0138 - 0.0154) 0.44 (0.0173)
0.39 - 0.43 (0.0154 - 0.0169) 0.48 (0.0189)
0.43 - 0.47 (0.0169 - 0.0185) 0.52 (0.0205)
0.47 - 0.51 (0.0185 - 0.0201) 0.56 (0.0220)
0.51 - 0.55 (0.0201 - 0.0217) 0.60 (0.0236)
0.55 - 0.59 (0.0217 - 0.0232) 0.64 (0.0252)
0.59 - 0.63 (0.0232 - 0.0248) 0.68 (0.0268)
0.63 - 0.67 (0.0248 - 0.0264) 0.72 (0.0283)
0.67 - 0.71 (0.0264 - 0.0280) 0.76 (0.0299)
0.71 - 0.75 (0.0280 - 0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315)
0.75 - 0.79 (0.0295 - 0.0311) 0.84 (0.0331)
0.79 - 0.83 (0.0311 - 0.0327) 0.88 (0.0346)
0.83 - 0.87 (0.0327 - 0.0343) 0.92 (0.0362)
0.87 - 0.91 (0.0343 - 0.0358) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.48 (0.0189)
0.91 - 0.95 (0.0358 - 0.0374) 0.48 (0.0189) + 0.52 (0.0205)
0.95 - 0.99 (0.0374 - 0.0390) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.52 (0.0205)
0.99 - 1.03 (0.0390 - 0.0406) 0.52 (0.0205) + 0.56 (0.0220)
1.03 - 1.07 (0.0406 - 0.0421) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.56 (0.0220)
1.07 - 1.11 (0.0421 - 0.0437) 0.56 (0.0220) + 0.60 (0.0236)
1.11 - 1.15 (0.0437 - 0.0453) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.60 (0.0236)
1.15 - 1.19 (0.0453 - 0.0469) 0.60 (0.0236) + 0.64 (0.0252)
1.19 - 1.23 (0.0469 - 0.0484) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.64 (0.0252)
1.23 - 1.27 (0.0484 - 0.0500) 0.64 (0.0252) + 0.68 (0.0268)
1.27 - 1.31 (0.0500 - 0.0516) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.68 (0.0268)
1.31 - 1.35 (0.0516 - 0.0531) 0.68 (0.0268) + 0.72 (0.0283)
1.35 - 1.39 (0.0531 - 0.0547) 1.44 (0.0567)
1.39 - 1.43 (0.0547 - 0.0563) 0.72 (0.0283) + 0.76 (0.0299)
1.43 - 1.47 (0.0563 - 0.0579) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.76 (0.0299)
1.47 - 1.51 (0.0579 - 0.0594) 0.76 (0.0299) + 0.80 (0.0315)
1.51 - 1.55 (0.0594 - 0.0610) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.80 (0.0315)
1.55 - 1.59 (0.0610 - 0.0626) 0.80 (0.0315) + 0.84 (0.0331)
1.59 - 1.63 (0.0626 - 0.0642) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.84 (0.0331)
1.63 - 1.67 (0.0642 - 0.0657) 0.84 (0.0331) + 0.88 (0.0346)
1.67 - 1.71 (0.0657 - 0.0673) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.88 (0.0346)
1.71 - 1.75 (0.0673 - 0.0689) 0.88 (0.0346) + 0.92 (0.0362)
1.75 - 1.79 (0.0689 - 0.0705) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.92 (0.0362)
1.79 - 1.83 (0.0705 - 0.0720) 0.92 (0.0362) + 0.96 (0.0378)
1.83 - 1.87 (0.0720 - 0.0736) 0.96 (0.0378) + 0.96 (0.0378)
1.87 - 1.91 (0.0736 - 0.0752) 0.52 (0.0205) + 1.44 (0.0567)
1.91 - 1.95 (0.0752 - 0.0768) 0.56 (0.0220) + 1.44 (0.0567)
AT-482
Reduction Pinion Gear
Reduction Pinion Gear NJAT0190

GI
Reduction pinion gear bearing preload 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
TURNING TORQUE MA
NJAT0190S02
Turning torque of reduction pinion gear 0.1 - 0.69 N·m (1.1 - 7.0 kg-cm, 0.95 - 6.08 in-lb)
EM
REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0190S03
Thickness mm (in) Part number* LC

1.74 (0.0685) 31438-31X16
1.78 (0.0701) 31438-31X17
1.82 (0.0717) 31438-31X18 EC
1.86 (0.0732) 31438-31X19
1.90 (0.0748) 31438-31X20
1.92 (0.0756) 31439-31X60
1.94 (0.0764) 31438-31X21
FE
1.96 (0.0772) 31439-31X61
1.98 (0.0780) 31438-31X22
2.00 (0.0787) 31439-31X62 CL
2.02 (0.0795) 31438-31X23
2.04 (0.0803) 31439-31X63
2.06 (0.0811) 31438-31X24
2.08 (0.0819) 31439-31X64 MT
2.10 (0.0827) 31438-31X60
2.12 (0.0835) 31439-31X65
2.14 (0.0843) 31438-31X61
2.16 (0.0850) 31439-31X66
2.18 (0.0858) 31438-31X62
2.20 (0.0866) 31439-31X67
2.22 (0.0874) 31438-31X63 AX
2.24 (0.0882) 31439-31X68
2.26 (0.0890) 31438-31X64
2.28 (0.0898)
2.30 (0.0906)
31439-31X69
31438-31X65
SU
2.34 (0.0921) 31438-31X66
2.38 (0.0937) 31438-31X67
2.42 (0.0953) 31438-31X68 BR
2.46 (0.0969) 31438-31X69
2.50 (0.0984) 31438-31X70
2.54 (0.1000) 31438-31X71
2.58 (0.1016) 31438-31X72
ST
2.62 (0.1031) 31438-31X73
2.66 (0.1047) 31438-31X74
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-483
Reduction Pinion Gear (Cont’d)
TABLE FOR SELECTING REDUCTION PINION GEAR BEARING ADJUSTING SHIM NJAT0190S04
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “T” Suitable shim(s)
1.77 - 1.81 (0.0697 - 0.0713) 1.74 (0.0685)

1.81 - 1.85 (0.0713 - 0.0728) 1.78 (0.0701)
1.85 - 1.89 (0.0728 - 0.0744) 1.82 (0.0717)
1.89 - 1.93 (0.0744 - 0.0760) 1.86 (0.0732)
1.93 - 1.96 (0.0760 - 0.0772) 1.90 (0.0748)
1.96 - 1.98 (0.0772 - 0.0780) 1.92 (0.0756)
1.98 - 2.00 (0.0780 - 0.0787) 1.94 (0.0764)
2.00 - 2.02 (0.0787 - 0.0795) 1.96 (0.0772)
2.02 - 2.04 (0.0795 - 0.0803) 1.98 (0.0780)
2.04 - 2.06 (0.0803 - 0.0811) 2.00 (0.0787)
2.06 - 2.08 (0.0811 - 0.0819) 2.02 (0.0795)
2.08 - 2.10 (0.0819 - 0.0827) 2.04 (0.0803)
2.10 - 2.12 (0.0827 - 0.0835) 2.06 (0.0811)
2.12 - 2.14 (0.0835 - 0.0843) 2.08 (0.0819)
2.14 - 2.16 (0.0843 - 0.0850) 2.10 (0.0827)
2.16 - 2.18 (0.0850 - 0.0858) 2.12 (0.0835)
2.18 - 2.20 (0.0858 - 0.0866) 2.14 (0.0843)
2.20 - 2.22 (0.0866 - 0.0874) 2.16 (0.0850)
2.22 - 2.24 (0.0874 - 0.0888) 2.18 (0.0858)
2.24 - 2.26 (0.0882 - 0.0890) 2.20 (0.0866)
2.26 - 2.28 (0.0890 - 0.0898) 2.22 (0.0874)
2.28 - 2.30 (0.0898 - 0.0906) 2.24 (0.0882)
2.30 - 2.32 (0.0906 - 0.0913) 2.26 (0.0890)
2.32 - 2.34 (0.0913 - 0.0921) 2.28 (0.0898)
2.34 - 2.37 (0.0921 - 0.0933) 2.30 (0.0906)
2.37 - 2.41 (0.0933 - 0.0949) 2.34 (0.0921)
2.41 - 2.45 (0.0949 - 0.0965) 2.38 (0.0937)
2.45 - 2.49 (0.0965 - 0.0980) 2.42 (0.0953)
2.49 - 2.53 (0.0980 - 0.0996) 2.46 (0.0969)
2.53 - 2.57 (0.0996 - 0.1012) 2.50 (0.0984)
2.57 - 2.61 (0.1012 - 0.1028) 2.54 (0.1000)
2.61 - 2.65 (0.1028 - 0.1043) 2.58 (0.1016)
2.65 - 2.69 (0.1043 - 0.1059) 2.62 (0.1031)
2.69 - 2.73 (0.1059 - 0.1075) 2.66 (0.1047)
Output Shaft — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63

SEAL RING CLEARANCE NJAT0238S01
Unit: mm (in)
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

Output shaft seal ring clearance
Output shaft bearing preload 0.03 - 0.08 mm (0.0012 - 0.0031 in)
TURNING TORQUE NJAT0238S03
Turning torque of output shaft 0.25 - 0.88 N·m (2.5 - 9.0 kg-cm, 2.2 - 7.8 in-lb)
AT-484
Output Shaft — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 and 3AX64 models (Cont’d)
OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING ADJUSTING SPACERS NJAT0238S04

GI
6.26 (0.2465) 31437-31X16
6.30 (0.2480) 31437-31X17
6.34 (0.2496) 31437-31X18 MA
6.38 (0.2512) 31437-31X19
6.42 (0.2528) 31437-31X20
6.46 (0.2543) 31437-31X21
6.50 (0.2559) 31437-31X22 EM
6.54 (0.2575) 31437-31X23
6.58 (0.2591) 31437-31X24
6.62 (0.2606) 31437-31X60 LC
6.64 (0.2614) 31437-31X78
6.66 (0.2622) 31437-31X61
6.68 (0.2630) 31437-31X79
6.70 (0.2638) 31437-31X62 EC
6.72 (0.2646) 31437-31X80
6.74 (0.2654) 31437-31X63
6.76 (0.2661) 31437-31X81
6.78 (0.2669) 31437-31X64
FE
6.80 (0.2677) 31437-31X82
6.82 (0.2685) 31437-31X65
6.84 (0.2693) 31437-31X83 CL
6.86 (0.2701) 31437-31X66
6.88 (0.2709) 31437-31X84
6.90 (0.2717) 31437-31X67
6.92 (0.2724) 31437-31X46
MT
6.94 (0.2732) 31437-31X68
6.96 (0.2740) 31437-31X47
6.98 (0.2748) 31437-31X69
7.00 (0.2756) 31437-31X48
7.02 (0.2764) 31437-31X70
7.06 (0.2780) 31437-31X71
7.10 (0.2795) 31437-31X72 AX
7.14 (0.2811) 31437-31X73
7.18 (0.2827) 31437-31X74
7.22 (0.2843) 31437-31X75 SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-485
Output Shaft — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19, 3AX63 and 3AX64 models (Cont’d)
TABLE FOR SELECTING OUTPUT SHAFT BEARING ADJUSTING SPACER NJAT0238S05
Unit: mm (in)
Dimension “T” Suitable spacer
6.29 - 6.33 (0.2476 - 0.2492) 6.26 (0.2465)

6.33 - 6.37 (0.2492 - 0.2508) 6.30 (0.2480)
6.37 - 6.41 (0.2508 - 0.2524) 6.34 (0.2496)
6.41 - 6.45 (0.2524 - 0.2539) 6.38 (0.2512)
6.45 - 6.49 (0.2539 - 0.2555) 6.42 (0.2528)
6.49 - 6.53 (0.2555 - 0.2571) 6.46 (0.2543)
6.53 - 6.57 (0.2571 - 0.2587) 6.50 (0.2559)
6.57 - 6.61 (0.2587 - 0.2602) 6.54 (0.2575)
6.61 - 6.65 (0.2602 - 0.2618) 6.58 (0.2591)
6.65 - 6.68 (0.2618 - 0.2630) 6.62 (0.2606)
6.68 - 6.70 (0.2630 - 0.2638) 6.64 (0.2614)
6.70 - 6.72 (0.2638 - 0.2646) 6.66 (0.2622)
6.72 - 6.74 (0.2646 - 0.2654) 6.68 (0.2630)
6.74 - 6.76 (0.2654 - 0.2661) 6.70 (0.2638)
6.76 - 6.78 (0.2661 - 0.2669) 6.72 (0.2646)
6.78 - 6.80 (0.2669 - 0.2677) 6.74 (0.2654)
6.80 - 6.82 (0.2677 - 0.2685) 6.76 (0.2661)
6.82 - 6.84 (0.2685 - 0.2693) 6.78 (0.2669)
6.84 - 6.86 (0.2693 - 0.2701) 6.80 (0.2677)
6.86 - 6.88 (0.2701 - 0.2709) 6.82 (0.2685)
6.88 - 6.90 (0.2709 - 0.2717) 6.84 (0.2693)
6.90 - 6.92 (0.2717 - 0.2724) 6.86 (0.2701)
6.92 - 6.94 (0.2724 - 0.2732) 6.88 (0.2707)
6.94 - 6.96 (0.2732 - 0.2740) 6.90 (0.2717)
6.96 - 6.98 (0.2740 - 0.2748) 6.92 (0.2724)
6.98 - 7.00 (0.2748 - 0.2756) 6.94 (0.2732)
7.00 - 7.02 (0.2756 - 0.2764) 6.96 (0.2790)
7.02 - 7.04 (0.2764 - 0.2772) 6.98 (0.2748)
7.04 - 7.06 (0.2772 - 0.2780) 7.00 (0.2756)
7.06 - 7.09 (0.2780 - 0.2791) 7.02 (0.2764)
7.09 - 7.13 (0.2791 - 0.2807) 7.06 (0.2780)
7.13 - 7.17 (0.2807 - 0.2823) 7.10 (0.2795)
7.17 - 7.21 (0.2823 - 0.2839) 7.14 (0.2811)
7.21 - 7.25 (0.2839 - 0.2854) 7.18 (0.2827)
7.25 - 7.29 (0.2854 - 0.2870) 7.22 (0.2843)
Output Shaft — 3AX10 and 3AX18 models NJAT0191

Unit: mm (in)
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

Output shaft seal ring clearance
END PLAY NJAT0191S02
Output shaft end play 0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in)
OUTPUT SHAFT END PLAY ADJUSTING SHIMS NJAT0191S03
0.56 (0.0220) 31438-31X46

0.96 (0.0378) 31438-31X47
1.36 (0.0535) 31438-31X48
AT-486
Bearing Retainer
Bearing Retainer =NJAT0192

Unit: mm (in)
GI
Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
Bearing retainer seal ring clearance
MA
Total End Play NJAT0193 EM

Total end play “T3” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY

LC
NJAT0193S01

EC
0.6 (0.024) 31435-31X01
0.8 (0.031) 31435-31X02
1.0 (0.039) 31435-31X03
1.2 (0.047) 31435-31X04
FE
1.4 (0.055) 31435-31X05
1.6 (0.063) 31435-31X06
1.8 (0.071) 31435-31X07 CL
2.0 (0.079) 31435-31X08
MT
Reverse Clutch End Play NJAT0194
Reverse clutch end play “T4” 0.65 - 1.00 mm (0.0256 - 0.0394 in)
THRUST WASHERS FOR ADJUSTING REVERSE CLUTCH END PLAY NJAT0194S01

AX
0.65 (0.0256) 31508-31X10

0.80 (0.0315) 31508-31X11 SU
0.95 (0.0374) 31508-31X12
1.10 (0.0433) 31508-31X13
1.25 (0.0492) 31508-31X14
1.40 (0.0551) 31508-31X15
BR
ST
Accumulator NJAT0195
O-RING NJAT0195S01
Unit: mm (in) RS
Accumulator Diameter (Small) Part number* Diameter (Large) Part number*
Servo release accumulator 26.9 (1.059) 31526-41X03 44.2 (1.740) 31526-41X02 BT

N-D accumulator 34.6 (1.362) 31526-31X08 39.4 (1.551) 31672-21X00
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. HA
RETURN SPRING NJAT0195S02
Unit: mm (in) SC
Accumulator Free length Outer diameter Part number*
QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 models 52.5 (2.067) 20.1 (0.791) 31605-80X00 EL

Servo release accumulator spring
Except QG18DE + 3AX10, 3AX18 mod-
52.5 (2.067) 20.4 (0.803) 31605-80X03
els
IDX
N-D accumulator spring 45.0 (1.772) 27.6 (1.087) 31605-33X01
AT-487
Band Servo
Band Servo NJAT0196

RETURN SPRING NJAT0196S01
Unit: mm (in)
Return spring Free length Outer diameter Part number*
2nd servo return spring 32.5 (1.280) 25.9 (1.020) 31605-31X20
OD servo return spring 38.52 (1.5165) 22.0 (0.866) 31605-31X21
Removal and Installation NJAT0197

Unit: mm (in)
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter 15.9 (0.626) or more
Shift Solenoid Valves NJAT0223
Gear Solenoid A Solenoid B
1st ON ON
2nd OFF ON
3rd OFF OFF
4th ON OFF
Solenoid Valves NJAT0224
Solenoid valve Resistance (Approx.) Terminal number
Shift solenoid A 20 - 30Ω 2
Shift solenoid B 5 - 20Ω 1
Ovr. clutch sol. 20 - 30Ω 3
Line pres. sol. 2.5 - 5Ω 4
T/conv. clutch sol. 5 - 20Ω 5
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor NJAT0225
Monitor item Temperature Specificaiton (Approximately)
Cold [20°C (68°F)] 1.5V 2.5 kΩ

Hot [80°C (176°F)] 0.5V 0.3 kΩ
Revolution Sensor NJAT0226
Condition Judgement standard
When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring
function.*1
CAUTION: Approximately 150 Hz
Connect the diagnosis data link cable to the vehicle diagnosis connector.
*1: A circuit tester cannot be used to test this item.
When vehicle parks. Under 1.3V or over 4.5V
Dropping Resistor NJAT0227
Resistance 10 - 15Ω
AT-488

At PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

At PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

At PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE GI

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NJAT0243

Available With Euro-OBD system EM

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-210

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-223

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-195

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-245

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-273

PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-189 AX

SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-258 SU

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-264 BR

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Available With Euro-OBD system

Not available (blank) Without Euro-OBD system

P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-189

P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-195

P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-201

P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-206

P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-210

P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-217

P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-223

P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-229

P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-239

P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-245

P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-252

P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-258

P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-264

P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-273

*1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

I Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal

I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

I Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-

Special Service Tools NJAT0006

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure

KV31103000 Installing differential oil seal

ST35325000 Installing differential oil seal

ST23540000 Removing and installing parking rod plate, manual RS

KV32101000 Installing throttle lever and manual shaft retaining HA

ST3306S001 Removing differential side bearing inner race

KV381054S0 I Removing idler gear bearing outer race

ST27180001 I Removing idler gear

ST30031000 Removing reduction gear bearing inner race

ST35272000 I Installing reduction gear bearing inner race

ST37830000 Installing idler gear bearing outer race

ST35321000 Installing output shaft bearing

ST33400001 I Installing oil pump housing oil seal

KV38105710 I Measuring clearance between side gear and MT

KV40104840 I Installing output shaft bearing outer race onto

Commercial Service Tools NJAT0007 ST

Puller I Removing idler gear bearing inner race RS

Drift Installing differential left side bearing EL

Tool name Description

Drift Installing differential right side bearing

Checking A/T Fluid NJAT0228

Changing A/T Fluid NJAT0229 ST

A/T Electrical Parts Location NJAT0008

Circuit Diagram NJAT0009

Cross-sectional View — 3AX00, 3AX01, 3AX19,